Owner`s Manual for Vehicle The Ultimate Driving Machine

Contents
A to Z
Owner's Manual
for Vehicle
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
M6
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW M6.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW M6's unique range of technical
features. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW M6 throughout an extended service life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
© 2007 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts,
only with the written consent of
BMW AG, Munich.
Order No. 01 41 0 014 244
US English VIII/07, 07 09 500
Printed in Germany
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
10
16
23
Cockpit
iDrive
Voice command system
Controls
28
45
56
59
69
81
Opening and closing
Adjusting
Transporting children safely
Driving
Everything under control
Technology for comfort, convenience
and safety
96 Lamps
101 Climate
108 Practical interior accessories
Mobility
200
202
208
214
216
224
Refueling
Wheels and tires
Under the hood
Maintenance
Replacing components
Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
232 Technical data
236 Short commands of voice command
system
240 Everything from A to Z
Driving tips
116 Things to remember when driving
121 BMW M6 Engineering
Navigation
124
126
138
147
Starting navigation system
Destination entry
Destination guidance
What to do if …
Controls
Notes
Reporting safety defects
Driving tips
4
7
176 Telephoning
191 BMW Assist
Navigation
Using this Owner's Manual
Communications
Communications Entertainment
The fastest way to find specific topics is to use
the index, refer to page 240.
At a glance
Contents
On/off and tone
Radio
Satellite radio
CD player and CD changer
AUX-In connection
USB/audio interface
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
150
154
161
164
170
171
Mobility
Entertainment
Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
Symbols used
We have made every effort to ensure that you
are able to find what you need in this Owner's
Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way
to find specific topics is to use the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Should you want to sell your BMW some day,
please remember to pass on the Owner's Manual as well; it is an important component of your
vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be happy to advise you.
You can find information on BMW, e.g. technology, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of information.
* Indicates special equipment, country-specific equipment and optional extras, as well as
equipment and functions not yet available at the
time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
command system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice command system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
4
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. In isolated cases it is possible that the features
described in this Owner's Manual could differ
from those on your vehicle.
Please bear in mind that the manual may contain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equipment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehicle's equipment.
5
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accompanying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
At a glance
When purchasing your BMW, you have decided
in favor of a model with individualized equipment and features. This Owner's Manual
describes all equipment offered for the
BMW M6.
Controls
Editorial notice
Driving tips
The individual vehicle
Notes
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and high-performance
electronics, requires specially adapted maintenance and repair methods. Have corresponding
work on your BMW performed only by your
BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with appropriately trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<
California Proposition 65 Warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts,
you simultaneously acquire the assurance that
they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to
ensure optimum performance when installed
on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accessories not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants.
Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or
similar accessories, may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect
the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See
your BMW center for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.<
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone (800) 8311117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you and your dealer or
BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in
Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa
region and from other countries, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport
Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C,
330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
The following applies only to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
Driving tips
Your BMW is covered by the following warranties:
Navigation
For US customers
Communications Entertainment
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Mobility
Reporting safety defects
Reference
Service and warranty
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Cockpit
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
1
Convertible: opening and closing rear
window 39
2
Convertible: opening and closing windows
together 39
High beams, headlamp flasher 98
3
Convertible: opening and closing rear
windows 38
High-beam assistant* 98
4
Opening and closing front windows 38
5
Folding exterior mirrors in and out* 51
6
Adjusting exterior mirrors 51
Automatic curb monitor 52
7
Turn signals 65
Parking lamps* 98
Check Control 74
Computer 70
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Opening luggage compartment
lid 34
> Press: accepting and ending
call, starting dialing* for
selected phone number and
redialing if no phone number is
selected
19
Head-Up Display* 93
> Press and hold: redialing
20
Low beams 96
Welcome lamps 96
Automatic headlamp control* 96
Daytime running lamps* 97
Welcome lamps 96
Adaptive Head Light* 98
High-beam assistant* 98
Volume
Activating/deactivating voice
command system* 23
Changing radio station 154
Selecting music track 165
Scrolling in phone book and in
lists with stored phone numbers
Parking lamps 96
21
Instrument lighting 100
MDrive, call up individual
settings 53
Individually programmable 53
10 Instrument cluster 12
11
Windshield wipers 66
Rain sensor 66
12
Starting/stopping engine and
switching ignition on/off 59
13 Ignition lock 59
At a glance
18
Mobile phone* 176
Controls
Buttons on steering wheel
Driving tips
9
17 Releasing hood 208
Navigation
Shift paddles 63
Communications Entertainment
8
14 Horn, entire surface
Steering wheel adjustment 52
16
Mobility
Steering wheel heater* 52
Cruise control 67
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
15
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
1
Indicator lamps for turn signals
2
Speedometer
3
Indicator and warning lamps 13
4
Tachometer 69
5
Engine oil thermometer 70
6
Display for
7
> Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic 63
> Engine oil level for manual
transmission 210
>
Check Control message present 74
> Odometer and trip odometer 69
> Computer 70
Engine oil level 210
> Date and remaining travel distance
for service requirements 72
> Indicator and warning lamps 74
> Speed of cruise control 68
Display for
> High-beam assistant* 98
8
Fuel gauge 70
9
Resetting trip odometer 69
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
The concept
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp lights up.
Indicator lamps without text messages
At a glance
Indicator and warning lamps
Parking lamps/low beams 96
High beams/headlamp flasher 98
Controls
The following indicator lamps signal particular
functions:
MDrive 53
M Dynamic Mode 83
Engine malfunction with deteriorating
emissions levels 215
Engine malfunction with deteriorating
emissions levels for Canadian
models 215
Text messages at the bottom edge of the
Control Display explain the meaning of the
displayed indicator and warning lamps.
You can consult Check Control for additional
information, e.g. regarding the cause of a malfunction or the appropriate actions to take, refer
to page 74.
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation
Lamp flashes:
DSC controls the drive and braking
forces for maintaining vehicle
stability 83
Communications Entertainment
Explanatory text messages
Handbrake applied for Canadian
models
Mobility
When the engine is started or the ignition is
switched on, some lamps are checked for
proper operation and light up briefly in the process.
Reference
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
different combinations and colors.
Driving tips
Handbrake applied 61
Cockpit
Around the center console: controls and displays
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
6
Control Display 16
7
Hazard warning flashers
8
Central locking system 32
9
Automatic climate control 101
PDC Park Distance Control* 81
Flat Tire Monitor 86
Convertible: opening the convertible top 41
Convertible: closing the convertible
top 41
Temperature setting,
left/right 101
Automatic air distribution and
volume 102
17 Bracket for cup holder* 111
Cooling function 104
18 Controller 16
Turn, press or move horizontally in four
directions
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control/recirculated-air mode 104
19 Opening start menu on Control Display 17
Maximum cooling 104
20 Drivelogic of Sequential Manual
Transmission 63
Residual heat mode 105
21 EDC Electronic Damper Control for
Sequential Manual Transmission 85
Switching off automatic climate
control 105
Air volume 103
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation 103
Rear window defroster 101
10 Changing
> radio station 165 165
> track 165 165
At a glance
Heated seats 51
22 DSC Dynamic Stability Control for
Sequential Manual Transmission 83
23 M Engine Dynamic Control POWER for
Sequential Manual Transmission 64
24 EDC Electronic Damper Control for
manual transmission* 85
25 MDM
> M Dynamic Mode for manual
transmission* 83
Controls
Interior lamps 100
Passenger airbag status lamp 91
16
Driving tips
4
5
15 Entertainment sound output on/off
and adjusting volume 165 165
Navigation
Reading lamps 100
SOS: initiating an emergency request 224
14 Drive for audio CDs 165 165
Communications Entertainment
2
3
13 Drive for navigation DVD in Professional*
navigation system 124
> Switching DSC on and off in manual
transmission* 84
11 Ejecting
> navigation DVD* 124
> audio CD 165 165
12 Programmable memory/direct selection
buttons 21
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
Microphone for hands-free mode for
telephone*
and voice command system* 23
Convertible: microphone on steering
column
Reference
1
iDrive
iDrive
iDrive combines the functions of a multitude of
switches. This allows these functions to be
operated from a central position. The following
section provides an introduction to basic menu
navigation. The control of individual functions is
described in connection with the relevant
equipment.
Controls
1
Control Display
2
button
Opening the start menu
3
Controller
You can use the controller to select menu
items and change settings by:
To avoid becoming distracted and unnecessarily endangering both your own vehicle's occupants and other road users, never
attempt to use the controls or make entries
unless traffic and road conditions allow.<
> moving in four directions, arrows 4
> turning, arrow 5
> pressing, arrow 6
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
> BMW Assist* or TeleService*
Controls
Navigation or onboard information
> Navigation system*
> Onboard info, e.g. for displaying of the average fuel consumption
Entertainment
> Radio
Climate
> Vent settings
> Automatic programs
> Parked car operation
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
This displays the start menu.
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Navigation
> CD player and CD changer*
Start menu
menu
> Switching off the Control Display
> Tone and display settings
> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for MDrive, or
settings for the central locking system
> Display of maintenance intervals and deadlines for legally mandated inspections
> Settings for the telephone
At a glance
> Telephone*
From radio readiness, refer to page 59, the following message is shown on the Control Display:
Driving tips
Communication
Basic operation
You can call up all the functions of iDrive using
five menu items.
Opening start menu
Press the
button.
To open the start menu from the menu:
button twice.
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Press the
Communications Entertainment
Menu overview
iDrive
Opening menu items of start menu
Displays in menu
From the start menu, you can call up the four
menu items Communication, Navigation, Entertainment, and Climate by moving the controller
left, right, forward, or back.
1
Each menu is divided into fields. The currently selected field appears brighter.
2
A symbol indicates the last selected menu
item of the start menu:
You can open the menu by pressing the controller.
Communication
Comfort opening of menu items
Navigation or onboard info
Comfort opening offers you the option of:
> Opening a menu item of the start menu in
the view last selected
Entertainment
> Direct changing between Communication,
Navigation, Entertainment and Climate
without pressing the
button
Climate
menu
To do so, move the controller in the corresponding direction and hold it for approx. 2 seconds.
1
Menu items are usually grouped in horizontal or vertical lists.
2
Arrows indicate the possibility of accessing
other menu items that are not currently visible.
3
Settings are displayed graphically or
numerically.
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
You can view the individual steps under
Settings on Control Display, Setting time,
refer to page 78.
1
4
> Menu items shown in white can be
selected by marking
> Active field appears lighter
Activating a menu item:
> Press controller
> New menu items are displayed or
function is carried out
3
> Release controller
Selecting a menu item: refer to 1
5
Adjusting settings:
> Turn controller
> Graphic display, numerical value or text
displays can be changed
> Confirmation by changing field
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
2
Changing between fields:
> Briefly move controller left, right, forward
or back
> Turn controller; marking moves
Mobility
Selecting menu item:
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Driving tips
Controls
Basic operation via iDrive is described in this
view.
At a glance
Operating principle at a glance
iDrive
Status information
Assistance window*
1
Additional information appears in the assistance window:
Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD
> Telephone* in "Communication":
Name of linked mobile phone, network
search or no network
> "BMW Assist"*:
Existing voice connection with a service
from BMW Assist
2
Entertainment sound output off
3
Station that transmits traffic information is
received*:
> the computer or the trip computer
> the arrow or map view with navigation
system*
> the current position
Selecting display
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the controller.
"TI":
Traffic information for the navigation system can be received and transmission is
switched on
4
Display for:
>
New entries present in "Missed calls"*
>
5
6
Roaming active
Telephoning* is possible if the mobile
phone is paired in the vehicle
Reception strength of mobile phone
network, dependent on mobile phone
2. Select a menu item.
3. Press the controller.
Time
Other displays:
When Check Control information appears or
entries are made via the voice command system*, the status information is temporarily hidden.
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the
controller.
Programmable memory/
direct selection buttons
You can save and run certain functions of iDrive
on the programmable memory/direct selection
buttons:
At a glance
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the controller.
> Destinations of navigation
> Telephone, phone numbers
> Entertainment:
> radio station
Controls
Switching assistance window on/off
> CD compartment of CD changer*
> AUX
To switch on, change to the assistance window
and press the controller.
The assignment of the programmable memory/
direct selection buttons is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Driving tips
> CD
3. Select "Display off" and press the controller.
2. Press the
...
than 2 seconds.
button longer
Special features:
> With the destination guidance system and
the map view started, the current destination is stored.
> During destination entry via a map, the
coordinates at the cursor are stored, not the
current destination.
Telephone, phone numbers
To switch on, press the controller.
1. Enter the phone number or select it in a list
of the stored phone numbers, e.g. of the
A-Z list.
2. Press the
...
than 2 seconds.
button longer
If a name is assigned to the phone number, the
name will also be stored.
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
1. Select navigation destination, e.g. in the
destination list or the address book.
Mobility
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
Destinations of navigation
Reference
Switching Control Display
on/off
Navigation
Saving function
iDrive
Entertainment
Displaying detailed information
In the Entertainment menu, the sound source
currently heard, e.g. a radio station, is stored,
regardless of the selection on the Control Display.
Touch the
1. Select the desired function, e.g. radio station or CD.
2. Press the
...
than 2 seconds.
button longer
If the vehicle is equipped with two drives,
the current track is stored for CDs with
compressed audio files.<
...
button longer.
Deleting button assignments
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
5. Select "Programmable Memory Keys" and
press the controller.
Running function
Press the
...
button.
When selecting a phone number, the connection is also established, or the destination guidance is started when a navigation destination is
selected.
Displaying button assignment
You can display the assignment of the buttons
by touching them with your finger. Please do
not wear gloves when doing so. Touching with
an object, e.g. a pen, does not function.
6. Select "Delete assignment of all memory
keys" and press the controller.
7. Acknowledge with "Yes".
Displaying short info
Touch the
...
button.
The assignment of the buttons is displayed.
Destination of navigation system
Entertainment source
Telephone, phone number
Not assigned
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
1. Press the
button.
Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. This frees you of
having to use the controller.
Driving tips
The voice command system transforms your
spoken commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
The voice command system includes a special
microphone.
The microphone is located:
> Near the interior rearview mirror in the
Coupe, refer to page 14
> On the steering column in the Convertible
This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal tell you that the voice
command system can respond to commands.
Prerequisite
In order to enable identification of the commands to be spoken, use iDrive to set the language for the voice command system. Setting
iDrive language, refer to page 80.
Symbols in Owner's Manual
2. Say the command.
The command is displayed on the Control
Display.
This symbol is shown on the Control Display
when you can input additional commands.
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates the responses of the voice
command system.
Controls
Activating voice command system
Navigation
The voice command system allows you to control operation of various vehicle systems without taking your hands off the steering wheel.
Voice commands
Communications Entertainment
The concept
At a glance
Voice command system*
Voice command system
If no other commands are possible, then operate the equipment using iDrive.
Terminating or canceling voice
command
Press the
or
button on the steering wheel
{Cancel}
An example: selecting a track
1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if
necessary.
2. Press the
button on the steering wheel.
3. {Entertainment}
The system says:
{{Entertainment}}
Commands
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the system read aloud the possible commands related to the selected menu
item on the Control Display.
To have the system list the possible commands:
{Options}
For example, if you have selected "CD", the
system will read aloud the possible commands
for operating the CD player and the CD
changer*.
4. {CD}
The system says:
{{CD on}}
Opening help
{Help}
Using alternative commands
There are often several commands for running
a function, e.g.:
{Radio on} or {Turn radio on}
Running functions directly with short
commands
With short commands you can run certain functions directly, regardless of which menu item is
selected, refer to page 236.
5. Press the
button on the steering wheel.
6. Select a track, e.g.:
{Track 1}
The system says:
{{Track 1}}
Opening start menu
{Main menu}
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
The mobile phone can also be operated
with voice commands, refer to
page 187.<
At a glance
Notes
> When selecting a radio station, use the
usual pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language of the
voice command system and do not use
abbreviations.
> Keep the doors, windows and convertible
top closed to prevent interference from
ambient noise.
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Communications Entertainment
> Avoid background noises in the vehicle
while speaking.
Driving tips
> Always issue commands in the language of
the voice command system.
Navigation
> Say the commands and numbers smoothly
and at normal volume, avoiding excessive
emphasis and pauses. This also applies to
spelling when entering the destination.
Controls
For voice commands, bear the following in
mind:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
Its extensive array of features and accessories,
both for driving and for your own safety,
comfort and convenience, are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Keys/remote control
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Hotel function, refer to page 33
> Driver's door, refer to page 32
> Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 34
New remote controls
To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new
remote controls with an integrated key are
available at your BMW center.
1
Remote control with integrated key
2
Spare key
3
Adapter for spare key, in glove compartment
Remote control with integrated key
Each remote control contains a battery which is
charged in the ignition lock while driving. Drive a
longer distance with each remote control at
least twice a year to keep the battery charged.
For comfort access*, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 38.
Spare key
Store the spare key in a safe place such as your
wallet. This key is not intended for regular use.
The spare key and integrated key of the remote
control fit the same locks.
Adapter for spare key
The adapter is required so that the vehicle can
be started with the spare key or radio readiness
can be switched on.
Depending on which remote control is detected
by the vehicle during unlocking, different settings are activated and executed in the vehicle,
refer to Personal Profile, page 29.
Information on the required maintenance is also
stored in the remote control, refer to Service
data in remote control, page 214.
Remove the adapter from the holder in the
glove compartment and slide the spare key into
the adapter before use.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to unlock the key.
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 65
This means that you will always find your BMW
set to your own personal settings even if
another person with his/her own remote control
and settings has used the vehicle since the last
time you drove it. The individual settings are
stored for a maximum of four remote controls.
Personal Profile settings
Details on the settings are provided on the
specified pages.
> Behavior of the central locking system
when unlocking vehicle, refer to page 30
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 33
> Programming button on steering wheel,
refer to page 53
> Displays on Control Display:
> Welcome lamps, refer to page 96
> Daytime running lamps*, refer to
page 97
> High-beam assistant*, refer to page 98
> Drivelogic driving program in the Sequential
mode, refer to page 63
> Individual settings for MDrive, refer to
page 53
> PDC Park Distance Control*: optical warning, refer to page 82
> Head-Up Display*: selection and brightness of display, refer to page 93
> Automatic climate control: for AUTO program and intensity, cooling function, and
automatic recirculated air control/recirculated air mode, temperature, air distribution,
temperature in the upper body region, refer
to page 102
> Navigation system*: voice instructions for
destination guidance, refer to page 124
The most recent settings for the following are
also called up during unlocking:
> Date format, refer to page 79
> Programmable memory/direct selection
buttons: selecting stored functions, refer to
page 44
> Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 79
> Driver's seat, exterior-mirror and steeringwheel position, refer to page 47
> Units of measure for consumption,
route/distances, temperature and pressure, refer to page 79
> Audio sources: volume and tone settings,
refer to page 151
> 12h/24h clock mode, refer to page 78
> Radio: display of stored stations, refer to
page 154
> Phone: adjusting volume, refer to page 182
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
> Language on the Control Display, refer
to page 80
Controls
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 97
Driving tips
You can set a number of functions of your BMW
individually according to your preferences.
Personal Profile ensures that most of these settings are stored for the remote control currently
in use without you having to do anything. When
the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding
remote control is detected and the settings
stored for it are called up and carried out.
Navigation
The concept
At a glance
> Lighting settings:
Communications Entertainment
Personal Profile
Opening and closing
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system is ready for operation whenever the driver's door is closed.
The system either locks or unlocks all of the following:
> Doors
> Compartment in the front center console
> Luggage compartment lid
> Fuel filler door
Operating from outside
> via the remote control
> via the door lock
> with comfort access* via the door handles
These actions operate the anti-theft system at
the same time. It prevents the doors from being
unlocked using the lock buttons or door handles. The interior lamps and the courtesy lamps
are also switched on and off with the remote
control. The alarm system is armed/disarmed at
the same time.
You can find more detailed information on the
alarm system on page 35.
Opening and closing:
Using remote control
Persons or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from
the inside. Always take along the remote control
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.<
Unlocking
Press the
button.
You can set how the vehicle is unlocked. The
setting is stored for the remote control currently
in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
Operating from inside
Via the central locking button, refer to page 32.
The fuel filler door and the compartment in the
front center console are not locked, refer to
page 32.
In the event of a serious accident, the central
locking system unlocks automatically. The hazard warning flashers and interior lamps are also
switched on.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the controller.
7. Select "Unlock button" and press the controller.
8. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the
button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"*
Press the
button once to unlock only
the driver's door and the fuel filler door.
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
9. Press the controller.
Confirmation signals
Comfort opening mode
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
signals.
Press and hold the
1. Open the start menu.
button:
> Coupe: the windows are opened.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
> Convertible: the windows and the convertible top are opened.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
Watch the convertible top during the
opening process to be sure that no
one is injured. Releasing the button stops
the operation.<
Locking doors
Press the
button.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Confirmation" and press the controller.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside, as unlocking from the
inside is not possible without special knowledge.<
Switching on interior lamps
With vehicle locked:
Press the
button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
7. Select the desired signal.
Panic mode*
8. Press the controller.
The signal is activated.
You can trigger the alarm system in case of danger:
Malfunction
Press the
button for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off alarm: press any button.
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. Should the remote control fail
to operate due to interference of this kind,
unlock and lock the vehicle via the door lock
using a key.
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
A previously locked luggage compartment lid is also locked again after closing.
Coupe: during opening, the luggage compartment lid pivots back and up. Make sure there is
sufficient clearance.<
Navigation
button for approx. 1 second.
The luggage compartment lid opens, regardless of whether it was previously locked or
unlocked.
Communications Entertainment
Press the
Mobility
Opening luggage compartment lid
Reference
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
Opening and closing
If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle
using the remote control, then the battery is
discharged. Use this remote control during an
extended drive; this will recharge the battery,
refer to page 28.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
LX8CAS2
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device may not cause harmful interference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
When unlocking
1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's
door and the fuel filler door.
2. A second turn of the key unlocks the passenger door and luggage compartment lid.
Convenient operation
You also have the option of operating the windows and the convertible top on the Convertible
from the driver's door lock.
Turn and hold the key in the positions for
unlocking or locking.
Keep a close eye on the closing process
and also on the opening process of the
convertible top to be sure that no one is injured.
Releasing the key stops the operation.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
turn a key all the way to the right or left in the
door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.
Opening and closing: from
inside
Using door lock
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside, as unlocking from the
inside is not possible without special knowledge.<
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the luggage compartment lid, but does not activate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler door
remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
7. Select a menu item:
The hotel function locks the compartment in
the front center console and the luggage compartment lid separately and disconnects them
from the central locking system. If you hand
over the remote control without the integrated
key, refer to page 28, e.g. at a hotel, then this
prevents access to the luggage compartment
and to the compartment in the front center console.
> "Lock after driving"
The central locking system locks the
vehicle as soon as you start to drive.
8. Press the controller.
The setting is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Unlocking and opening
> Either unlock both doors at the same time
with the button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the
armrest or
> pull the door handle for each door twice: the
first pull unlocks the door, and the second
one opens it.
Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock both
of the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
At a glance
Navigation
> "Relock door if not opened"
The central locking system locks again
after a short time if no door has been
opened.
Controls
Hotel function
Driving tips
6. Select "Central locking" and press the controller.
Persons or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from
the inside. Always take along the remote control
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.<
Turn the key to the right, refer to illustration,
until the key slot points in the direction of travel
and then remove:
The hotel function is activated after subsequent
locking or unlocking of the vehicle. The system
locks the luggage compartment lid and the
compartment in the front center console and
disconnects them from the central locking system.
Communications Entertainment
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
Unlocking manually
In order to manually unlock the compartment in
the front center console in the event of an electrical malfunction, turn the key all the way to the
right until it reaches the stop.
If unlocking was manual, return the lock to
the home position, i.e. all the way back to
the left, before reactivating the hotel function.<
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Reference
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
Opening and closing
Doors
Automatic soft closing*
To close the doors, merely push them gently.
The closing process will then be carried out
automatically.
Convertible: if the convertible top is not
completely open or closed, then the luggage compartment lid cannot be opened, refer
to page 41.<
Unlocking manually
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise injuries may
result.<
Luggage compartment lid
During opening, the luggage compartment lid pivots back and up. Make sure
there is sufficient clearance.<
Opening from inside
The luggage compartment lid lock is located
under the BMW emblem. All keys, refer to
page 28, fit the luggage compartment lid lock.
Turn the key toward the right up to the stop: the
luggage compartment lid opens.
If you use the lock to open the luggage
compartment lid while the alarm system
is armed, the alarm will be triggered. To prevent
this, you should deactivate the alarm beforehand.
If the alarm has been triggered accidentally,
switch off the alarm, refer to page 35.<
Press the button:
The luggage compartment lid opens, provided
that it is not locked or the hotel function is not
activated, refer to the above section.
Opening from outside
Press the upper half of the BMW emblem or
press the
button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second: the luggage compartment lid
opens.
Closing
Make sure that the closing path of the
luggage compartment lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.<
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull
down.
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
At a glance
Emergency release
> by switching on the hazard warning flashers
> by flashing the high beams
Arming and disarming alarm system
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
You can open the luggage compartment lid,
even with the system armed, by using the
button of the remote control, refer to page 31.
When the luggage compartment lid is closed,
it is once again locked and monitored.
Switching off alarm
> Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
refer to page 30, or
With the convertible top closed, you can
increase the luggage compartment capacity:
To do so, unfold the handle and press it downward in the direction of travel, refer to arrow.
This moves the convertible top compartment
floor into the raised position.
> insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Before opening the convertible top, carry out
this procedure in reverse order.
The convertible top cannot be opened if
the convertible top compartment floor is
in the raised position.<
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation
Convertible: increasing luggage
compartment capacity
> by triggering an acoustic alarm
Communications Entertainment
There are four lashing eyes on the inner corners
of the luggage compartment for securing luggage nets* or securing straps to fix luggage in
position.
Also refer to Securing cargo, page 119.
Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by
the alarm system:
Mobility
Luggage compartment
> To interruptions in battery voltage
Reference
Pull the lever in the luggage compartment.
The luggage compartment lid is unlocked.
> To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the
vehicle
Driving tips
> To movements in the vehicle interior:
interior motion sensor, refer to page 36
Controls
> To the opening of a door, the hood, or the
luggage compartment lid
Opening and closing
Indicator lamp displays
objects, e.g. leaves, can trigger false alarms,
refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time.
This prevents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the
following situations:
> In two-level garages
> The indicator lamp below the interior rearview mirror flashes continuously: the system is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: the
doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are
not properly closed. Even if you do not close
the alerted area, the system begins to monitor the remaining areas, and the indicator
lamp flashes continuously after approx.
10 seconds. However, the interior motion
sensor is not activated.
> After the vehicle is unlocked, the indicator
lamp goes out: no manipulation or
attempted intrusions have been detected in
the period since the system was armed.
> When transporting on car-carrying trains,
by sea or on a trailer
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the
button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the vehicle is unlocked and locked again.
Comfort access*
> The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted into the
ignition lock, however for a maximum of
approx. 5 minutes: an attempted entry has
been detected in the period since the system was armed.
Comfort access allows you to access your vehicle without having to hold the remote control in
your hand. It is sufficient to carry the remote
control with you, e.g. in your jacket pocket. The
vehicle automatically detects the associated
remote control in the immediate vicinity or in
the interior.
Tilt alarm sensor
Comfort access supports the following functions:
Monitors the inclination of the vehicle. The
alarm system reacts, for example, if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle.
Interior motion sensor
Coupe:
The condition for proper operation of the interior motion sensor is closed windows.
Convertible:
Monitors the interior up to the height of the seat
cushions. This means that the alarm system,
including the interior motion sensor, is armed
even if the convertible top is open. Falling
> Unlocking/locking vehicle
> Comfort closing with Coupe
> Opening luggage compartment lid separately
> Starting engine
Functional requirement
> The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid
can only be locked if the vehicle detects that
the remote control you are carrying is outside the vehicle.
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
> The engine can only be started if the vehicle
detects that the remote control is located in
the vehicle.
Please make sure that the ignition and all
electronic systems/consumers are
switched off before locking to save the battery.<
Unlocking
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Removing the
hand from the door handle stops the closing
process immediately.<
Convertible: window and convertible
top operation
From radio readiness switched on, the windows
can be opened and closed, and with the vehicle
stopped the convertible top, when a remote
control is located in the interior of the vehicle.
Opening luggage compartment lid
separately
Press the upper half of the BMW emblem.
This corresponds to pressing the
button.
Grasp a door handle fully, refer to arrow 1, but
do not touch the surfaces, arrow 2 or 3 when
doing so. This corresponds to pressing the
button.
Driving tips
The windows are closed.
If a remote control accidentally left in the
luggage compartment is detected inside
the locked vehicle after the luggage compartment lid has been closed, then the luggage
compartment lid opens again. The hazard warning flashers flash and a signal* sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness
Locking
By pressing the Start/Stop button, you switch
on the radio readiness, refer to page 59.
> On the driver's door, touch the highlighted
surface, arrow 2, with a finger for approx.
1 second, but do not grasp the door handle.
When doing so, do not depress the brake
or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine will
start immediately.<
> On the front passenger door, touch the
highlighted surface, arrow 3, with the back
of your hand for approx. 1 second, but do
not grasp the door handle.
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation
Should a short delay occur when opening
or closing the windows or the convertible
top, the system is checking whether a remote
control is located in the vehicle. Please repeat
opening or closing if necessary.<
Hold a finger or the back of your hand against
the surface, arrow 2 or 3, but do not grasp the
door handle while doing so.
Communications Entertainment
The special features when using comfort
access are described below.
Coupe: comfort closing
Mobility
You can control the functions mentioned previously with the comfort access or by pressing
the buttons on the remote control. Before doing
so, please familiarize yourself with the information on opening and closing, starting on
page 28.
Reference
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
but-
At a glance
This corresponds to pressing the
ton.
Controls
> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Opening and closing
Starting engine
You can start the engine or switch on the ignition if a remote control is located in the interior
of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the ignition lock, refer to page 59.
If you take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle with the engine running, a
warning lamp lights up. In addition, a message
appears on the Control Display. As long as no
remote control is detected, it is only possible to
restart the engine within approx. 10 seconds
after it is switched off.
Windows
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the windows and keep them in
your field of vision until they are shut.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for
example, operate the windows and injure themselves.<
Coupe: opening, closing
Malfunction
The comfort access function may malfunction
due to local radio waves. If this occurs, then
open or close the vehicle with the buttons on
the remote control or with a key. To start the
engine after this, insert the remote control in the
ignition lock.
When unlocking or locking/comfort closing do
not simultaneously grasp the door handle and
touch the surfaces, arrow 2 or 3. Otherwise, you
may limit the function.
Replacing battery
If the battery of the remote control is dead, a
message will appear in the Control Display.
1. Remove integrated key from remote control, refer to page 28.
> Press switch to resistance point:
The window continues to open for as long
as you hold down the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the opening movement.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
Convertible: opening, closing
For information on window operation with comfort access, also refer to page 37.
To close the side windows while the vehicle is being driven, always close the rear
windows first or all four windows simultaneously; otherwise, the windows cannot close
tightly at higher speeds.<
2. Remove cover.
3. Insert new battery with positive side facing
upward.
4. Press cover closed.
Return used battery to a recycling collection point or to your BMW center.<
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
All windows open automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the opening
movement.
At a glance
Individually
Rear window
2. Press switch 2:
Together
> Down to the resistance point:
The rear window continues to open for
as long as you hold down the switch.
You can close the rear window in the
same manner by pulling the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The rear window opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the
opening movement.
1. Briefly press button 1:
The LEDs in button 1 and switch 2 light up
for approx. 10 seconds.
2. Press switch 2:
> Down to the resistance point:
All windows, including the rear window,
continue to open as long as you press
the switch.
You can close the windows in the same
manner by pulling the switch.
Briefly press button 1 again to deactivate the
function. The LEDs go out.
The rear window opens and closes automatically when you open or close the convertible top.<
For information on using the convenient operation mode at the door lock or with the remote
control, refer to page 31 or 32.
Coupe: for information on comfort closing with
comfort access, refer to page 37.
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
1. Briefly press button 1:
The LEDs in button 1 and switch 2 light up
for approx. 10 seconds.
Mobility
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch. The rear windows cannot
be closed automatically.
Reference
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the opening movement.
Navigation
Driving tips
> Press switch to resistance point:
The window continues to open for as long
as you hold down the switch.
Controls
Briefly press button 1 again to deactivate the
function. The LEDs go out.
Opening and closing
After switching off ignition
You can still operate the windows with the
remote control removed or the ignition
switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as
neither of the doors has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted
and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the window's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
thin objects, and the window would continue
closing.
Do not install any accessories in the range of
movement of the windows, otherwise the pinch
protection system will be impaired.
Convertible: the rear side windows and rear
window are not equipped with a pinch protection system. Therefore, watch the rear side windows and the rear window during closing, otherwise injuries can occur.<
Closing without pinch protection
system
In case of danger from outside or if, for example,
ice on the window prevents normal closing, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point
and hold. The pinch protection system is
limited and the window opens slightly if the
closing force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point
and hold again within approx. 4 seconds.
The window closes without the pinch protection system.
Convertible: top
The fully automatic convertible top combines
secure weather protection with simple and convenient operation.
Here are a few tips for getting the maximum
pleasure from your Convertible:
> It is advisable to close the convertible top
when the vehicle is parked. The closed convertible top not only protects the passenger
compartment from unforeseen weather
damage, it also provides a certain amount of
protection from theft. Nonetheless, even if
the convertible top is closed, only keep
valuables in the locked luggage compartment.
> Do not attach luggage rack systems to the
convertible top.
In order to avoid damage, do not move the
convertible top at temperatures below
+ 147/–10 6.
Do not leave the convertible top in its storage
compartment for longer than one day when wet;
otherwise, damage from moisture can occur.
Do not place any objects on the convertible top;
otherwise, if the top were to be operated, these
objects could fall off and lead to damage or
injury.
Never move the convertible top when the rollover protection system is raised.
Driving without having completed the opening
or closing action can lead to damage or injury.
Do not place hands in the top mechanism during the opening and closing action. Keep children away from the travel path of the convertible top.
For safety reasons, do not move the convertible
top unless the vehicle is stationary.<
If you have initiated top movement with
the vehicle at a stop and then start to
drive, e.g. at a traffic light, you can continue the
initiated operation up to a speed of 20 mph/
30 km/h:
To do so, press and hold the corresponding
button.<
Partial vacuums that occur at higher
speeds in the passenger compartment
can make the convertible top flap. Use the automatic climate control to increase the air volume
so that a partial vacuum in the vehicle does not
occur.<
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
LED
> Read the safety precautions above carefully
and comply with them fully.
In the following situations, in addition to the
LED, a message is displayed on the Control
Display and an acoustic signal may sound:
> If the LED flashes red when you release the
button, the opening or closing action has
not yet finished.
Opening and closing
> If the LED lights up red when the button is
pressed, either the convertible top compartment floor in the luggage compartment
is in the raised position or a malfunction has
occurred. The convertible top cannot be
moved.
Interruption
The automatic sequence of movements is
interrupted if the button for top operation is
released. The sequence can be continued in
the desired direction by pressing the appropriate button.
If the opening or closing action is interrupted for
a longer period, the convertible top remains in
that position for approx. 15 minutes before it
slowly moves to a stable position.
A convertible top which is not completely
opened or closed presents a danger.
Do not interrupt and continue the closing action
several times in succession; otherwise, the top
mechanism can be damaged.<
1
Closing
2
LED
3
Opening
If the convertible top is not completely
open or closed, then the luggage compartment lid cannot be opened.<
When the button for operating the convertible top is pressed, the side windows
move downward slightly and the rear window is
lowered completely.
If you hold down the button after the LED 2
goes out, then the windows travel upward
again.
If the convertible top is not completely open or
closed, then the luggage compartment lid cannot be opened.<
Convenient operation with remote
control and via door lock
Navigation
To avoid putting excessive strain on the
battery, only move the convertible top
when the engine is running if possible.
Before closing the convertible top, remove foreign objects from the windshield frame, as
these might inhibit closing of the convertible
top.<
Communications Entertainment
From radio readiness, refer to page 59, with the
vehicle stationary:
Refer to pages 31 and 32.
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
For information on top operation with comfort
access, also refer to page 37.
Driving tips
> Make sure that the luggage compartment
lid is closed.
Controls
> During convertible top operation, the LED
lights up green. It goes out as soon as the
opening or closing action is finished.
Reference
> Ensure that the convertible top compartment floor in the luggage compartment is
folded down, refer to page 35, as otherwise
the convertible top cannot be opened.
At a glance
Prior to opening and closing
Opening and closing
Closing manually
Only close the convertible top manually if
absolutely necessary; never open it manually. The convertible top compartment lid cannot be locked in the event of an electrical malfunction and would open while the vehicle is
being driven.
Improper handling can lead to damage.<
Before closing
1. Open luggage compartment lid.
2. Take the Allen wrench and the screwdriver
from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 216.
2. Insert the Allen wrench as far as possible
into the opening and turn firmly in the direction indicated by the arrow until the rear
window is completely open.
3. Pry out the two buttons in the luggage compartment with the screwdriver and then pull
firmly. This unlocks the convertible top
compartment lid.
Closing
4. Close luggage compartment lid.
During manual convertible top operation, the luggage compartment lid
cannot be opened.<
5. Completely open the side windows and the
rear window.
If the rear window cannot be opened using
the switch, it must be lowered manually.
Perform the following work steps with the
assistance of a second person and with
the doors open, otherwise injury and damage to
the convertible top can occur.<
1. Push the cover 1 on the left and right of the
side panel forward. Reach into the resulting
openings and raise the convertible top
compartment lid 2 as far as it will go.
Opening rear window manually
1. Pry out the cover between the rear head
restraints. To do so, place the screwdriver
as close as possible to the locking elements, as shown in the illustration.
2. Grasp the top with both hands at the left and
right side frame, arrow 3.
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
6. From the interior, take out the cover in the
center of the front top frame; use a screwdriver if necessary.
Do not carry out the next operation,
raising top ends, until the top has
been swung forward, otherwise damage
can occur.<
4. Raise the two convertible top ends as far as
possible, arrow 5, and close the convertible
top compartment lid, arrow 6.
10. If necessary, close the rear window again
manually in the same way as above.
Wind deflector*
The wind deflector keeps the air movement in
the passenger compartment to a minimum
when the convertible top is open, thus enabling
pleasant driving even at higher speeds.
The wind deflector is stowed in a protective
sleeve in the luggage compartment. Short
instructions for use are also provided on the
protective sleeve.
5. Fold the top ends down onto the convertible top compartment lid.
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation
Communications Entertainment
9. Turn the Allen wrench in the direction of the
arrow until the front convertible top frame is
locked to the windshield frame.
The rear convertible top ends are automatically pressed onto the convertible top compartment lid and close tightly with tension.
Mobility
8. From the outside, both persons pull the
front frame of the convertible top downward, as simultaneously as possible on the
two sides.
Reference
3. Together with the other person, pull the two
sides of the convertible top out simultaneously and pivot forward. When doing so,
keep the convertible top compartment lid
open, arrow 4, e.g. with your shoulder.
Driving tips
Controls
7. Insert the Allen wrench into the opening
provided.
At a glance
Only lift out the top by the side frame,
otherwise the top may be damaged.<
Opening and closing
Before installing
1. Remove the wind deflector from the protective sleeve and fold it open, refer to
arrows 1.
2. Press the upper and lower section together
until the locking device engages, refer to
arrow 2.
3. Push the securing pin 3 out until it engages.
3. Push the securing pin 3 on the left side into
the appropriate opening until it snaps into
place.
4. Fold up the upper half 4 of the wind deflector.
With wind deflector fitted: do not incline
the front seat backrests too far backward
if the seat is to be moved back to the end position. Otherwise, the wind deflector will be damaged.<
Removing
The same as installing, but in reverse order.
Folding up
4. Unfold the rear mounts 4.
Installing
1. Insert the securing pin 1 of the wind deflector into the appropriate opening on the right
side of the vehicle.
1. Push the handle of the securing pin on the
wind deflector on the left side of the vehicle
all the way back and release the locking
mechanism.
2. Fold in the upper and lower section.
2. Guide the rear mounts 2 into the receptacles provided.
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at
the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to minimize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms
in the event of airbag deployment.
No one and nothing is to come between the airbags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly
and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument
panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the
knee and front airbags are triggered.
Make sure that occupants do not rest their head
on the side or head airbags; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.<
Even if you adhere to all the instructions, injuries resulting from contact with airbags cannot
be fully excluded, depending on the circumstances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensitive individuals. This effect is usually only temporary.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
Your vehicle has four seats that are each
equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt lies low around the
hips in the lap area and does not press on the
abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across
the neck, rub against sharp edges, be routed
over solid or breakable objects or be pinched.
Wear the safety belt without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Otherwise, the belt can slip
over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact
and injure the abdomen. Avoid wearing clothing
that prevents the belt from fitting properly and
pull the shoulder belt upward periodically to
readjust the tension across your lap in order to
avoid a reduction in the restraining effect of the
safety belt.<
Controls
Driving tips
Head restraints, refer to page 48.
Navigation
Airbags
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise, there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident.<
Communications Entertainment
For additional information on Transporting children safely, refer to page 56.
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in an accident.
Safety belts refer to page 50.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 90.
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
The ideal sitting position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the
interaction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seat position
plays an important role in an accident. To
ensure that the safety systems operate with
optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to follow the instructions contained in the following
section.
Head restraints
Reference
Sitting safely
At a glance
Adjusting
Adjusting
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
operating the vehicle. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
On the front passenger side as well, do not tilt
the backrest too far toward the rear. Failure to
observe this precaution can prevent the belt
from providing effective protection against
injury, as the passenger could slide under the
belt in an accident.<
Please follow the instructions on damage to
safety belts provided on page 51 and the information on the active front head restraints on
page 48.
Convertible: with the wind deflector fitted,
do not incline the front seat backrests too
far backward if the seat is to be moved back to
the end position. Otherwise, the wind deflector
will be damaged.<
Adjusting seat
To ensure that the safety systems continue to provide optimized protection,
please follow the adjustment instructions on
page 45.<
6
Coupe: backrest width
7
Lumbar support
Lumbar support
You can also adjust the contours of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive supplementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature:
Press front or rear of switch.
> Move curvature up or down:
Press top or bottom of switch.
Thigh support
You can also adjust the thigh support manually:
Pull the lever and adjust the thigh support in the
longitudinal direction.
1
Inclination
2
Longitudinal direction
3
Height
4
Backrest
5
Convertible: head restraints, refer to
page 49
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
The adjusting procedure for the steering wheel
is interrupted if you briefly press the switch for
the steering wheel adjustment in any direction,
refer to page 52.
At a glance
Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory
The adjustments of the lumbar support and the
backrest width are not stored in the memory.
The last positions of the driver's seat, external
rearview mirrors, and steering wheel are stored
for the remote key currently in use.
Storing
You can choose when the position is requested:
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer
to page 59.
> Request when unlocking vehicle
2. Adjust the desired seat, exterior mirror and
steering-wheel positions.
3. Press the
button:
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3:
The LED goes out.
Requesting
Do not request a position from the memory while the vehicle is moving. There is a
risk of accident from unexpected movement of
the seat or steering wheel.<
> Request when opening driver's door
When using this feature, always make
sure that the footwell behind the driver's
seat is empty and unobstructed. If you fail to do
so, any persons or objects behind the seat
could be injured or damaged by a rearward
movement of the seat.<
The system cancels the adjustment procedure
when you briefly press one of the seat adjustment switches or one of the memory buttons.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Comfort mode
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or
switch on radio readiness, refer to page 59.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1,
2 or 3.
The system cancels the adjustment procedure
when you briefly press one of the seat adjustment switches or one of the memory buttons.
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
Activating with remote control
Navigation
If the
button was pressed inadvertently:
press the button again; the LED goes out.
Communications Entertainment
You can store and select three different adjustment settings for the driver's seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel.
Mobility
2. Press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3
and maintain pressure until the adjustment
process has been completed.
Reference
1. Close the driver's door and switch ignition
on or off, refer to page 59.
Controls
Safety feature
Adjusting
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the controller.
7. Select "Last seat pos." and press the controller.
8. Select "After unlocking" or "After door
opened".
Active front head restraints
In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient
severity, the active head restraint reduces the
distance to the head.
Do not use seat covers or head restraint
covers that could impede the proper
functioning of the active head restraint. Otherwise, there is no assurance that the active head
restraint will perform its protective function and
it is not possible to take advantage of its injuryreducing potential in the event of a rear-end
collision.
Have the active head restraints reset after they
are triggered in a rear-end collision. Only have
this work carried out by a BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, this safety equipment will
not function properly.<
Please contact a BMW center if you wish
to have the front head restraints removed
and installed.<
Coupe
Adjusting height
9. Press the controller.
To cancel the request:
Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.
Front head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise, there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident. Only remove the head restraints if no
one will be sitting on the seat in question. Reinstall the head restraints before transporting
passengers, as otherwise the head restraint
cannot provide its protective function.<
> To raise: pull the head restraint upward.
> To lower: slide the head restraint downward.
To reach the lowest position, press the
button, refer to arrow 1.<
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Entering rear
Coupe: releasing backrest
At a glance
Navigation
Do not place any objects behind the
headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can
impair the proper function of the head
restraint.<
Convertible
Adjusting height
Pull the lever upward and fold the backrest forward.
The lever is designed so that the safety belt can
be hooked onto it. This enables you to fasten
the safety belt more conveniently.
Convertible: releasing backrest
Move the switch up or down.
Front seats: adjusting distance to the
back of the head
The belt system integrated in the seat makes it
easier to get in back.
> Forward: pull up.
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
> >Back: push the button and slide the headrest cushion toward the rear.
Mobility
> Forward: pull up.
Before starting to drive, fold backrests
back, otherwise there is the danger of
accident due to an unexpected movement of
the seat.<
Controls
Do not place any objects behind the
headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can
impair the proper function of the head
restraint.<
Driving tips
> Back: push the button and slide the headrest cushion toward the rear.
Reference
Front seats: Adjusting distance to the
back of the head
Adjusting
1. Pull lever 1 up and fold the backrest forward.
2. Press and hold button 2 until the seat has
moved into the desired position.
3. After passengers have entered the rear, fold
the backrest back and lock it in place.
4. Press and hold button 3 until the seat has
moved back into its previous position. If you
release button 3 before this, the seat stops
in its current position.
You can lock the backrest in place when it
is folded forward. This is useful, for example, when you get into the vehicle while it is
parked on a hill. Press the backrest until it audibly locks into place. To fold it back, you do not
need to use lever 1 to release it.<
Lock backrest warning lamp:
Lights up when the backrest is not
locked. At the same time, a message is
shown on the Control Display.
Safety belts
To ensure that the safety systems continue to provide optimized protection,
please follow the adjustment instructions on
page 45.<
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
Fastening
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Releasing
1. Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be in
the correct position for adults of every build if
the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 46.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and passenger seat*
The indicator lamp lights up and a signal sounds. At the same time, an additional message appears on the Control
Display. Please check whether safety belts are
being worn correctly.
The safety belt reminder is operative at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be activated if objects are placed on the passenger
seat.
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
3
Folding mirrors in and out*
Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory on page 47.
Adjusting manually
You can also adjust the mirrors manually by
pressing against the outer edges of their mirror
glass.
Folding exterior mirrors in and out
The temperature setting advances one step in
its control sequence each time you press the
button. The maximum temperature is supplied
when three LEDs are lit.
The temperature is reduced and if need be, the
heating is switched off in order to reduce the
load on the battery. The LEDs remain lit.
To switch off:
Press the button longer.
Mirrors
Pressing button 3 allows you to fold mirrors
in and out up to a speed of approx. 20 mph/
30 km/h. This is advantageous, for example, in
car washes, narrow streets or for bringing mirrors that have been manually folded-in back into
the correct position. Mirrors that were folded in
are folded out automatically at a speed of
approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Before going through a car wash, fold the
mirrors in manually, or with button 3, otherwise they could be damaged, depending on
the width of the car wash system.<
Automatic heating
Exterior mirrors
The mirror on the passenger's side is
more curved than the driver's mirror.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance of
following traffic based on what you see in the
mirrors; otherwise, there is an increased accident risk.<
Controls
Switching to the other mirror or to the
automatic curb monitor
Driving tips
2
Navigation
Adjusting
Below a certain outdoor temperature, both
exterior mirrors are heated whenever the
engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
Heated seats
1
Reference
When subjected to strain due to an accident or in the event of damage, replace
the safety belts, the belt tensioners, and any
child restraint systems and have the belt anchor
points checked. Have this work carried out only
by a BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with
appropriately trained personnel. Otherwise,
correct operation of this safety equipment is not
guaranteed.<
Communications Entertainment
Damage to safety belts
Adjusting
Tilting down passenger-side mirror –
automatic curb monitor
Activating
1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror
position, arrow 1.
Also do not attach stickers to the windshield in
front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjusting
Do not adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is moving. There is a risk of accident as the result of unexpected movement.<
2. Shift into reverse or move selector lever into
position R.
The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat
on the passenger's side. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle – such as a curb – when parking, etc.
Deactivating
Slide switch into the passenger side mirror
position, arrow 2.
Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four
directions.
Storing the steering-wheel position, refer to
Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory,
page 47.
Easy entry/exit
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,
the steering wheel temporarily moves into the
uppermost position.
Steering wheel heating*
This feature is controlled by two photocells in
the inside rearview mirror. One is integrated
within the mirror's lens, while the other is
located at an offset position on the rear of the
mirror housing.
For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells
clean and do not cover the area between the
interior rearview mirror and the windshield.
Press the button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up when
the steering wheel heater is switched on.
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
> "Air recirculation on / off"
Permanently shutting off outside air,
refer to AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control on page 104
> "Mute on / off"
Mutes the audio sources
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
> "Telephone list"*
Display/hide phone book or last list of
stored phone numbers displayed
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
> "Next entertainment source"
Changes audio source
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
5. Select the desired function unit and press
the controller.
Operating function
Press the button on the steering wheel.
If you have programmed "Navigation voice
instructions" for the button:
> To switch voice instructions on/off:
Press the button longer.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Steering wheel button" and press
the controller.
> To repeat the last voice instruction:
Press the button.
MDrive
With MDrive you can configure several individual settings for your vehicle on the Control Display and activate them simultaneously with the
button on the steering wheel.
Driving tips
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
> "Monitor on / off"
Switches the Control Display on/off
Navigation
You can program the button individually.
At a glance
> "Navigation voice instructions"
Voice instructions of the navigation system*
Controls
A list of different functions appears:
Communications Entertainment
Programmable button on steering
wheel
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
With the ignition switched on you can change
the settings of MDrive on the Control Display.
Mobility
Configuring settings
Adjusting
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
4. Select the desired function.
5. Press the controller.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "MDrive" and press the controller.
The functions contained in MDrive are displayed:
6. Turn the controller to select the desired setting.
"Unchanged" retains the current setting
made outside of MDrive.
> "SMG Drivelogic"
Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic: shifting modes and Drivelogic driving programs, refer to page 63
7. Press the controller.
> "EDC"
Programs of the Electronic Damping
Control, refer to page 85
Activating settings
> "DSC"
Dynamic Stability Control and
M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 83
> "POWER"
Programs of the M Engine Dynamic
Control, refer to page 64
> "Head-Up Display"*
Views of the Head-Up Display, refer to
page 93
You can reset all settings for MDrive to their
default values:
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Press the
button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up. The settings made on
the Control Display for the functions
contained in MDrive are active.
Pressing the button again deactivates MDrive.
If the indicator lamp flashes after pressing
the button, MDrive was unable to react, as
the ABS Antilock Brake System or DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is currently controlling the vehicle stability. Press the
button
again when the indicator lamp no longer
flashes.<
> "Reset to default"
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Reference
Mobility
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Driving tips
Controls
Even with MDrive activated, you can change
individual settings outside MDrive, e.g. with the
buttons in the center console. To reactivate all
settings made for MDrive on the Control Display: press the
button twice.
Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger
themselves and other persons, e.g. by opening
the doors.<
Children always in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
with a height under 5 ft/150 cm may only
be transported in the rear in child restraint systems which correspond to the age, weight and
height of the child. Otherwise, there is an
increased danger of injury in an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
size and weight.
On front passenger seat
After mounting a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated, as otherwise there is
an increased risk of injury if the airbags are triggered.<
Backrest width
Before mounting a child restraint system
on the front passenger seat, the backrest
width adjustment must be completely open.<
1. Adjust the backrest width to the fully open
position, refer to page 46.
2. Install child's seat.
Child seat security
Exception for front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front, knee and side airbags on the
passenger side must be deactivated before
doing so. Otherwise, there is an increased risk
of injury to the child if the airbags are triggered,
even with a child restraint system.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 91.
Installing child restraint
systems
Follow child restraint system manufacturer's instructions for the selection,
installation and use of child restraint systems.
Otherwise, the degree of protection they offer
may be reduced.<
All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the
front passenger can be locked against pulling
out to secure child restraint systems.
Locking safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull taut against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Follow the system manufacturer's
instructions on installation and use of
LATCH child restraint systems in order not to
impair their protective function.<
Anchor points for LATCH mounts
Before attaching the LATCH child's seat, pull
the belt away from the region of the child
restraint fixing system.
Make sure that both of the lower LATCH
mounts have properly clicked into place
and that the child restraint system is resting
snugly against the backrest. Otherwise, the
protective action may be impeded.<
There are two additional mounting points for
child restraint systems with a tether strap, refer
to arrows.
Placement of tether strap
Make sure that the tether strap is not
routed over sharp edges and does not
twist on its way to the upper mounting point;
otherwise, the belt may not properly secure the
child restraint system in the event of an accident.<
Rear seats
The mounting points for the LATCH anchors
are located at the positions indicated by arrows
in the gap between the seat and the backrest.
At a glance
Controls
LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHildren.
1
Direction of travel
2
Head restraints
3
Tether strap hook
4
Mounting point
5
Rear window shelf/luggage compartment
floor
6
Backrest
7
Tether strap of child restraint system
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
Navigation
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in completely.
Only use the top tether-strap mounting
points to secure child restraint systems,
otherwise the mounting points could be damaged.<
Communications Entertainment
2. Remove the child restraint system.
Coupe: child restraint system with
tether strap
Mobility
1. Open the belt buckle.
Reference
Unlocking safety belt
Transporting children safely
Before using the mounting points, fold the head
restraint* into its raised position.
1. Slide the head restraint into the bottom
position.
2. Guide the tether strap over the head
restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook to the mounting point.
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Start/Stop button
Comfort access*
With comfort access, only insert the remote
control into the ignition lock in exceptional
cases, refer to page 36.
Removing remote control from ignition
lock
Do not pull the remote control out of the
ignition lock using force, as otherwise
damage may result.<
Radio readiness
Some electronic systems/consumers are ready
for operation. The last information of the computer selected is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Radio readiness is switched off:
> when the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
Before removing the remote control, first press
it in as far as possible to release the locking
device.
> with comfort access* by touching the surface on the door handle, refer to Locking on
page 37
The ignition is switched off if it was still
switched on.
Ignition on
All electronic systems/consumers are ready for
operation. The odometer and the trip odometer
are displayed in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 69.
Please switch off the ignition and the
electronic systems/consumers which are
not required when the engine is not running to
save the battery.<
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation
Radio readiness switches on.
Some electronic systems/consumers are ready
for operation.
Manual transmission: the engine starts
when you depress the brake pedal while
pressing the Start/Stop button.
Sequential Manual Transmission: the engine
starts when you press the Start/Stop button
with the brake depressed and the selector lever
in position P or N.<
Communications Entertainment
Insert the remote control as far as possible into
the ignition lock.
Mobility
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the
radio readiness or the ignition on and off.
Driving tips
Controls
Inserting remote control into ignition
lock
Reference
Ignition lock
At a glance
Driving
Driving
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
Starting engine
Do not run the engine in closed rooms,
otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause unconsciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle represents a
potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine running, shift into neutral* or move the selector
lever into position N and firmly apply the handbrake, otherwise the vehicle can begin to roll.<
Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic
Remote control in ignition lock or with comfort
access in vehicle, refer to page 36.
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Place selector lever in position N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
If the engine does not start, shift back to
the last selector lever position selected,
refer to the instrument cluster display or the
selector lever. Then select position N.
You cannot start off with the hood open.
When the engine is cold, the exhaust system
has a slightly metallic undertone due to the system design.<
Switching engine off
Avoid frequent starting in quick succession or repeated starting attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned at all or is burned inadequately and there is a danger of overheating and
damage to the catalytic converter.<
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
remote control with you.
When parking, firmly apply the handbrake, as
otherwise the vehicle could roll.<
Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it
running while the vehicle remains stationary.
Instead, drive off at a moderate engine speed.
1. Press the Start/Stop button with the vehicle
stopped.
Manual transmission*
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Firmly apply the handbrake.
4. Remove the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 59.
Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic
1. Firmly apply the handbrake.
2. Move selector lever into a drive position.
Manual transmission*
Remote control in ignition lock or with comfort
access in vehicle, refer to page 36.
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Depress the clutch pedal and select the
idling position.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
If N is engaged when switching off the
engine, this will be pointed out to you optically and acoustically.
4. Remove the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 59.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Manual transmission*
The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes
the rear wheels.
At a glance
Handbrake
Indicator lamp
Releasing
When engaging the 1st gear, a slight jolt may
occur. This is operation-related and no reason
for concern.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
Press the gearshift lever to the left, overcoming
a slight resistance.
Shift lights
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
If exceptional circumstances should
make it necessary to apply the handbrake
while the vehicle is in motion, do not pull it too
firmly. In doing so, continuously press the button of the handbrake lever. Otherwise, too firm
an application of the handbrake can lock up the
rear wheels and cause the rear of the vehicle to
swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided braking action, occasionally engage the handbrake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the handbrake is applied.<
To achieve the best vehicle acceleration with a
sporty driving style, shift lights in the Head-Up
Display* indicate the optimum shifting point
briefly before reaching the maximum rpm. Refer
to Shift lights, page 64.
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation
The lever locks in position automatically.
Communications Entertainment
Applying
Mobility
When shifting into 5th/6th gear, press the
gearshift lever toward the right, otherwise
an inadvertent shift into 3rd or 4th gear could
lead to engine damage.<
Reference
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Driving tips
Controls
The indicator lamp lights up, and a signal also sounds when starting off. The
handbrake is applied.
Driving
Sequential Manual
Transmission with Drivelogic
R Reverse
The concept
N Idle
The SMG Sequential Manual Transmission
with Drivelogic is an automated manual transmission in which an electrohydraulic system
handles the clutching and gear changes.
Always engage before starting engine.
The Sequential Manual Transmission is operated with the selector lever and two shift paddles on the steering wheel.
It offers the following functions:
> Choice of manual or automatic mode:
Sequential mode or Drive mode
> Selection option between different driving
programs, Drivelogic, refer to page 63
> Upshift display, shift lights, refer to page 64
> Automatic downshifting and prevention of
incorrect shifting even in Sequential operation
> Automatic double clutching
Selector lever positions
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
If the driving situation requires, e.g. when downshifting on a slippery road surface, the Sequential Manual Transmission automatically
clutches and then declutches again, i.e. it is not
necessary to engage idling manually.
The system shifts into N when you open
the driver's door or the hood with the
engine running and do not operate pedals, shift
paddles or the selector lever. To begin driving
after closing the driver's door or the hood, first
shift the selector lever into the N position, and
then shift into drive.<
S Sequential mode
You can shift up and down using the shift paddles or the selector lever. You do not need to
remove your foot from the accelerator to do so.
After every engine start, as soon as the selector
lever is pushed to the right into the drive position Β and the brake pedal is pressed, the
Sequential mode is activated.
Starting off is also possible on a level road surface in second gear, e.g. in case of ice.
In the following situations, the Sequential Manual Transmission thinks for you:
> R: Reverse gear
> N: Neutral, idle
> Β: Drive position:
> +: manual upshifting
> –: manual downshifting
> D/S: switch between Drive mode and
Sequential mode
Shiftlock
> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for
example, the system will not execute a
downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev.
> When the vehicle is stationary, the transmission automatically downshifts into first
gear.
> Shortly before dropping below a geardependent minimum speed, the transmission downshifts automatically even without
your intervention.
Press the brake pedal before shifting out of N;
the shift command will not be executed unless
the brake is applied.
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Displays in instrument cluster
> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift
paddle –.
Drivelogic
With Drivelogic various driving programs are
available to you.
1
Gear 1 to 7, R, N engaged
2
Selected driving program,
matches the number of illuminated fields,
refer to Drivelogic on page 63
3
In drive mode, the currently selected gear
followed by a D is displayed.
The gear display flashes when you open
the driver's door with the engine running.
If you do not subsequently operate the pedals,
shift paddles, or selector lever, then the system
shifts into N.<
Gear changes
Using selector lever
> To upshift, pull the selector lever back.
> To downshift, push the selector lever forward.
Each time you change between the Sequential
mode and the Drive mode, the driving program
last selected in the respective mode is active.
Exception: after the first change from the
Sequential to the Drive mode, driving program 3
is active.
In Drive mode
There are five different driving programs, ranging from relaxed 1 to sporty/highly dynamic 5.
In Sequential mode
You can choose from six driving programs from
balanced/dynamic 1 to sporty/purist 6.
Each time the engine is started, driving
program 3 is activated.
Program 6 is only available when the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, refer
to page 83. If DSC is activated, then the system
switches from program 6 to program 5
To maintain vehicle stability, always activate DSC whenever possible.<
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift
paddle +.
Driving tips
Kick-down: for rapid acceleration, e.g. passing,
press the accelerator pedal as far down as it will
go. You achieve maximum acceleration.
Navigation
To switch back into the Sequential mode: shift
using the shift paddles or the selector lever or
press selector lever to the right toward D/S
again.
Communications Entertainment
Shifting from Sequential mode to Drive mode:
press selector lever to the right toward D/S.
Mobility
Using shift paddles on steering wheel
In the Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted
automatically.
Reference
D Drive mode
Driving
Selecting driving program with button
in center console
7. Turn the controller to set the driving program.
8. Press the controller.
Shift lights
To achieve the best vehicle acceleration with
a sporty driving style in the Sequential mode,
shift lights in the Head-Up Display* indicate the
optimum shifting point briefly before reaching
the maximum rpm.
Press the button repeatedly until the desired
driving program is displayed in the instrument
cluster, refer to page. 63
1. Switch on Head-Up Display, refer to HeadUp Display on page 93.
2. Select display "M View" on Head-Up Display, refer to Selecting displays on page 93.
Selecting driving program via button
on steering wheel
You can also activate your preferred driving program with the
button on the steering wheel,
refer to MDrive on page 53.
With the ignition switched on you can change
the settings of MDrive on the Control Display.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "MDrive" and press the controller.
4. Select "SMG Drivelogic" and press the controller. The first setting is selected.
The current engine speed is highlighted on
the tachometer.
3. When approaching the maximum rpm, yellow illuminated fields 1 of the tachometer
consecutively indicate the approaching
upshift point.
4. Shift at the latest when the red indicator
field 2 lights up.
When the permissible maximum rpm is
reached, the entire tachometer begins to flash.
When the maximum rpm is exceeded, the fuel
supply is cut off to protect the engine. Always
avoid engine speeds in this range.
5. Turn the controller to set Drive mode or
Sequential mode.
"Unchanged" retains the current settings
made outside of MDrive.
6. Press the controller to select driving programs.
M Engine Dynamic Control
With M Engine Dynamic Control you can influence how sporty the reaction of your vehicle to
accelerator pedal movements is to be. Three
programs are available for engine control.
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
1
High beams
In the "P 500 Sport" program the engine reacts
especially spontaneously and uncompromisingly sporty with maximum performance to
accelerator pedal movements.
2
Headlamp flasher
3
Turn signals
Selecting program
Move the lever beyond the resistance point.
Using turn signals
To switch off manually, only press the lever to
the resistance point.
Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates the failure of a turn signal
lamp.<
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there as long as you wish to signal.
Each time the engine is started, the "P 400"
program is activated.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the POWER button to activate the
"P 500" program. Pressing the POWER button
repeatedly switches between the programs
"P 400" and "P 500".
Press the lever to the resistance point; the turn
signals flash three times.
You can also activate your preferred program
with the
button on the steering wheel, refer
to MDrive on page 53. You can only activate the
"P 500 Sport" program with MDrive.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
For the programs "P 500" and "P 500 Sport"
the LED in the POWER button lights up.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Navigation
"P 500 Sport" program
Communications Entertainment
The "P 500" program provides maximum performance and more spontaneous reaction of
the engine to accelerator pedal movements.
Driving tips
Controls
"P 500" program
At a glance
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
In the "P 400" program the engine reacts gently
to the movement of the accelerator pedal. This
is, for example, ideal for city driving or driving on
snow. In the process, the fuel consumption is
minimal and the engine output is reduced.
Reference
"P 400" program
Driving
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Lighting" is selected and
press the controller.
Fast wiper speed
Briefly press twice or press beyond the resistance point.
The system reverts to operation at normal
speed whenever the vehicle is stationary.
Rain sensor
Wiper operation is controlled automatically as a
function of the rain intensity. The rain sensor is
located on the windshield, directly in front of the
interior rearview mirror.
6. Select "Triple turn signal" and press the
controller.
Triple turn signal is activated.
Activating rain sensor
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Wiper system
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the button lights up.
Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level
Turn the knurled wheel 5.
Deactivating rain sensor
1
Switching on wipers
2
Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3
Activating/deactivating rain sensor
4
Cleaning windshield and headlamps
5
Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level
Switching on wipers
Pull the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system reverts to operation in the intermittent mode whenever the vehicle is stationary.
Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes
out.
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash. Failure to
do so could result in damage caused by undesired wiper activation.<
Cleaning windshield and headlamps
Pull the lever, arrow 4:
The system sprays washer fluid against the
windshield and activates the wipers for a brief
period.
When the vehicle lighting is switched on, the
headlamps are simultaneously washed at
appropriate intervals.
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
One lever for all functions
Filler neck for washer fluid
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reservoir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recommendations.
In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix
the washer fluid before filling.<
Capacity
Capacity approx. 5.3 US quarts/5 liters.
1
Maintaining, storing and increasing speed
2
Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
decelerating
3
Interrupting and deactivating system
4
Resuming stored speed
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
For this reason, keep it away from ignition
sources and store only in the closed original
container out of reach of children. Otherwise,
there is the danger of bodily injury. Always follow the instructions for use provided on the
containers.<
Do not use the cruise control under driving conditions that do not permit a constant speed, e.g. when driving on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions
such as snow, rain, ice, and loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident.<
Navigation
Washer fluid
The cruise control is available for use at speeds
of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h and higher. The
vehicle stores and maintains the speed that you
set using the lever mounted on the steering column. To maintain the specified speed, the system brakes if the engine braking effect is not
sufficient on a downhill grade. Speed can drop
on uphill grades if the engine output is insufficient.
Communications Entertainment
Both windshield washer nozzles are automatically heated with the engine running or the ignition switched on.
The concept
Maintaining, storing and increasing
speed
Press lever to resistance point, arrow 1:
The system maintains and stores the current
vehicle speed. The display 1 in the speedometer, see below, indicates this regulated speed.
Every time you press the lever, the vehicle's
speed increases by roughly 1 mph/1 km/h.
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
Windshield washer nozzles
Cruise control
Reference
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do so, your vision could be
obscured. To avoid freezing, use a washer fluid
antifreeze, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use
washers when the washer fluid reservoir is
empty, as this will damage the washer pump.<
Driving
Press the lever to the resistance point and
hold it:
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system maintains
and stores your current speed as soon as you
release the lever.
Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
decelerating
Pull the lever, arrow 2:
Functions are the same as 1; the speed is
reduced.
Interrupting system
Press the lever up or down, arrow 3.
The display 1 in the speedometer changes
color.
In addition, the system is automatically interrupted:
> when you brake, even with the handbrake
> when you depress the clutch pedal
> when you shift manually
Resuming stored speed
Press button 4:
The vehicle accelerates to and maintains the
stored speed.
Deactivating system
> Press the lever up or down twice, arrow 3
> Switch off the ignition
The speed stored in the memory is deleted.
Displays in instrument cluster
1
Stored speed
2
Selected speed is displayed briefly
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Tachometer
Press button:
Navigation
Odometer and trip odometer
3
> with ignition switched on, trip odometer
is reset
> with ignition switched off, odometer is
briefly displayed
The advance warning field, arrow 1, and the red
warning field, arrow 2, change depending on
the engine temperature. As the engine temperature rises, the permissible engine speed also
increases. Avoid allowing the engine speed to
rise as far as the advance warning field whenever possible.
Be sure to avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. At high revs in this range, the flow of
fuel is interrupted to protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
Should the coolant and therefore the engine
become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In
addition, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Checking coolant level, refer to page 213.
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
2
Mobility
Time, outside temperature, refer to Computer on page 70
Reference
1
Driving tips
Controls
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
At a glance
Everything under control
Everything under control
Engine oil temperature*
Computer
Displays in instrument cluster
The general operating temperature lies
between 1757/80 6 and 2507/1206. Do
not exceed a value of approx. 2657/1306.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, the permissible engine speed, and with it the available
engine output is reduced.
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
The following information is displayed in the
specified order:
> Time and outside temperature
> Cruising range
> Average fuel consumption
Fuel gauge
> Oil level, refer to Checking engine oil level
on page 210
Manual transmission:
The range, average consumption and
fluid level are shown in the lower display in place
of the gear indicator.
It is possible to change between the time and
date display by pressing the CHECK button.<
Time
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/
70 liters. You can find information on refueling
on page 200.
To set the time, refer to page 77.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
If the display drops to +377/+3 6, a signal
sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display. There is
an increased danger of ice.
Reserve
Ice can form even at temperatures above
+377/+3 6. Drive carefully, especially
on bridges and shaded roadways; otherwise,
your risk of accident increases.<
After the reserve quantity has been reached, a
message briefly appears on the Control Display;
the cruising range is shown in the computer.
Below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the
message remains on the Control Display.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Outside temperature warning
You can set the unit of measure 7 or 6 on the
Control Display, refer to Units of measure on
page 79.
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
To reset the average fuel consumption: press
the BC button in the turn signal lever for approx.
2 seconds.
For different routes
You can display the average speed for two different routes on the Control Display, refer to the
following and to Trip computer.
Displays on Control Display
You can also call up the computer via iDrive, for
operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to open
"Navigation".
Without navigation system*: open "Car
Data".
> Estimated time of arrival at destination and
remaining distance:
> Entering a distance manually in the computer, see below.
> Entering a destination in the navigation
system*, refer to page 124.
At a glance
Driving tips
Controls
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
switched off are not included in the calculations
of average speed.
Resetting values
You can reset the values for average speed and
average fuel consumption:
1. Select the desired menu item and press the
controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm.
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
Entering a distance manually
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the
controller.
Navigation
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is projected
based on the driving style over the last 20 miles/
30 km.
4. Select "Onboard info" and press the controller.
Communications Entertainment
Cruising range
Everything under control
2. Turn the controller to select the distance
to your destination. If necessary, hold it
against a slight resistance to enter a greater
difference.
3. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The distance is automatically predetermined
during the destination guidance of the navigation system*.
Display options
You can display the computer or the trip computer in the assistance window.
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the controller.
Trip computer
The trip computer is suitable for a vacation trip,
for example.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system*: open "Car
Data".
2. Select a menu item:
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
> "Onboard info"
4. Select "Trip computer" and press the controller.
> "Trip computer".
3. Press the controller.
> Departure time
> Driving time
> Distance traveled
Service requirements
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Switching trip computer on/off and resetting
all values:
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item and press the
controller.
The remaining driving distance and the date for
the next maintenance are displayed briefly with
the ignition switched on.
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
Your BMW Service Advisor can determine your vehicle's current service
requirements by reading out the data stored in
the remote control.<
Additional information
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the controller.
4. Select "Service" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or an official
inspection is approaching. Please
arrange a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
correctly, refer to page 79; otherwise, the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.
1. Open the start menu.
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the controller.
4. Select "Service" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.
Driving tips
1. Open the start menu.
To exit from the menu:
Select the
arrow and press the controller.
Navigation
You can view more detailed information by
using the Control Display, for operating principle refer to page 16.
At a glance
Select the entry and press the controller.
Communications Entertainment
The first oil change displayed at approx.
1,200 miles/2,000 km signals that the break-in
check is due.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry.
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
The display shows a list of selected service and
maintenance procedures, as well as legally
mandated official inspections.
Mobility
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.
Everything under control
7. Select "State inspection" and press the
controller.
8. Select "Set service date" and press the
controller. The month is selected.
Indicator and warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
different combinations and colors.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is selected.
11. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
12. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Select the
arrow and press the controller.
This symbol means that a Check Control
message has been generated. The symbol
remains visible even if the Check Control message has been hidden after a short time. The
combinations of warning lamps and text messages are stored and can be viewed later, also
refer to page 75.
Explanatory text messages
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors functions in the
vehicle and issues a message if there is a malfunction in the monitored systems. A Check
Control message of this kind includes indicator
or warning lamps in the instrument cluster, possibly an acoustic signal, and text messages at
the bottom of the Control Display.
Text messages at the bottom edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the indicator
and warning lamps displayed.
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
You can display supplementary information
regarding most Check Control messages, e.g.
as to the cause of a malfunction and corresponding actions to be taken, see below.
Hiding Check Control messages
Displaying supplementary information
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Info sources" is
selected and press the controller.
Press the CHECK button in the turn signal lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified. They
cannot be hidden. If a number of these malfunctions occur simultaneously, they are displayed
in succession.
Other messages are automatically hidden after
approx. 20 seconds, but remain stored.
4. Turn the controller until "Service" is
selected and press the controller.
Navigation
To exit the displayed information:
Select the
arrow and press the controller.
2. Press the button:
A new message appears each time you
press the button.
Communications Entertainment
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp lights up.
Driving tips
Controls
1. Press the button longer:
The first stored message is displayed.
At a glance
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Check Control messages"
is selected and press the controller.
Everything under control
Displays after completion of trip
Malfunction reports generated during the trip
are shown consecutively when you switch off
the ignition.
Before the display disappears, you can display
the messages once again. Press the CHECK
button for approx. 2 seconds. If several messages are present, you can press the CHECK
button repeatedly.
6. Select a message and press the controller.
The display:
> turns off automatically after a brief period
> can be turned off at any time by pressing
the CHECK button again for approx. 2 seconds
Speed limit
To exit from the menu immediately:
Select the
arrow and press the controller.
Displaying the urgency of malfunctions
You can enter a speed and a Check Control
message indicates when you have reached
this speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing limit
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system*: open "Car
Data".
Depending on the equipment, the stored Check
Control messages are also displayed with the
following symbols:
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.
No malfunctions detected in the monitored systems.
Malfunctions detected in the monitored
systems. Depending on the malfunction,
supplementary information is shown on
the Control Display.
The symbols also indicate the status of the service requirements display, refer to page 72.
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
7. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The limit is automatically switched on.
All of the other functions remain available
even while the stopwatch is running. The
stopwatch continues to operate in the background.<
Applying your current speed as limit
Select "Select current speed" and press the
controller. The system applies your current
speed as the limit.
Settings on Control Display
Activating limit
1. Press the
button once or twice until
the start menu appears.
Select "On" and press the controller.
The limit is automatically switched on.
At a glance
Select "Interim time" and press the controller.
The interim time appears below the ongoing
primary stopwatch count.
Controls
6. Turn the controller to set the limit. If necessary, hold it against a slight resistance to
enter a greater difference.
Taking an intermediate time reading
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Driving tips
5. Select the speed value and press the controller.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system*: open "Car
Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the controller.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Stopwatch
> Select "Reset" and press the controller.
The stopwatch is reset and it restarts if it
was running beforehand.
> Select "Stop" and press the controller.
This stops the timer.
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
> Select "Start" and press the controller.
The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.
Mobility
Starting, stopping, or resetting
Everything under control
Setting time
1. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Set time" is
selected and press the controller.
Making settings
2. Move the controller once to the front if necessary to change to the first field from the
top.
1. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
2. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
The changed time is stored.
Activating hour signal*
You will hear three tones just before the top of
each hour.
Select "Hour memo" and press the controller.
The hour signal is activated.
3. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected
and press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Setting 12h/24h format
1. Select "Time format" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
2. Select "Set date" and press the controller.
The first section of the date display is
selected, in this case the month.
3. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
4. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next adjustment is selected.
5. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the date is stored.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Units of measure
You can change the units of measure for fuel
consumption, distances, temperature and
pressure.
Setting date format
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Select "Date format" and press the controller.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the
controller.
Brightness of Control Display
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Units" is selected and press
the controller.
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the base setting.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
Controls
At a glance
7. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Driving tips
6. If necessary, move the controller to the right
to select "Display".
Navigation
1. Select "Date" and press the controller.
Communications Entertainment
Setting date
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Brightness" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select the menu item to be set.
7. Press the controller.
8. Select the desired unit of measure and
press the controller.
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
4. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
Mobility
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
Everything under control
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Language on Control Display
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the
controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Languages" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Text language" and press the controller. You can select a different language
for the text displays.
7. Select the desired language and press the
controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
PDC Park Distance Control*
At a glance
Technology for comfort, convenience and
safety
Switching off manually
Switching on automatically
An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds:
The system starts to operate approx. one second after you shift into reverse or move the
selector lever into position R with the engine
running or the ignition switched on.
> if you remain in front of an object that was
only detected by one of the corner sensors
Wait this short time before driving off.
Malfunction
Switching on manually
The LED in the button flashes and a message
appears on the Control Display. PDC is malfunctioning. Have the system checked.
> if you drive parallel to a wall
As a preventive measure, keep the sensors
clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure
that they will continue to operate effectively. Do
not spray the sensors with high-pressure cleaners for long periods and maintain a distance of
at least 4 in/10 cm to them.
Press the button; the LED lights up.
Exhaust gases near the rear sensors can cause
a signal tone to sound.
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate the
presence of objects when they are being
approached slowly, as is usually the case when
parking. Avoid approaching an object at high
speed; otherwise, the physical circumstances
could cause the system warning to be activated
too late.<
An intermittent signal indicates the distance of
the vehicle from an object being approached.
Thus, an object detected to the left rear of the
vehicle will be indicated by a signal tone from
the left rear speaker, etc. As the distance
between vehicle and object decreases, the
intervals between the tones become shorter. If
the distance to the nearest object falls to below
roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone
sounds.
Navigation
Signal tones
Communications Entertainment
After driving approx. 165 ft/50 m or at over
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system is
switched off and the LED goes out. You can
reactivate the system manually as needed.
Mobility
Automatic deactivation
Reference
The PDC assists you when you are parking.
Acoustic signals and an optical display* alert
you to the approach of an object from behind
your vehicle. To measure the distance, there
are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper.
The range of these sensors is approx. 7 ft/2 m.
However, an acoustic warning first sounds for
the sensors at the front and at the two rear corners at approx. 24 in/60 cm, and for the center
rear sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Controls
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
The concept
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
PDC with visual warning*
System limits
You can also enjoy the option of having the system show the approach to an object on the
Control Display. Objects that are farther away
are already shown there before a signal tone
sounds. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstacles always remains with
the driver. Even when sensors are involved,
there is a blind spot in which objects cannot be
detected. The system is also subject to the
physical limits that apply to all forms of ultrasonic measurement, such as those encountered with tow bars and trailer couplings, or thin
and wedge-shaped objects etc. Low objects
already displayed, e.g. curbs, can also disappear from the detection area of the sensors
again before or after a continuous tone already
sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges,
cannot be detected. For this reason, drive with
care; otherwise, there is a danger of personal
injury or property damage.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle
may prevent you from hearing the PDC signal
tone.<
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Vehicle / Tires" is
selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "PDC" is selected and press
the controller.
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW is equipped with an extended array
of systems designed to enhance and maintain
vehicle stability under extreme conditions.
ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS prevents the wheels from locking during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during hard braking. This increases active
driving safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. For information on safe braking, refer to
page 117.
6. Select "PDC display on" and press the controller.
The PDC screen is activated.
The display appears on the Control Display as
soon as PDC is activated.
CBC Cornering Brake Control
This system provides further enhancements to
vehicle stability and steering response when
braking while cornering or when braking during
a lane change.
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC optimizes the vehicle stability and traction.
It also detects unstable driving states such as
understeering and oversteering, and helps
keep the vehicle on course within the physical
limits by reducing the engine output and by
braking at the wheels.
The DSC is operational every time you start the
engine.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Do not reduce the additional safety margin of the system by taking risks.<
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp goes out shortly
after the engine is started.
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC is controlling the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up continuously: DSC
is deactivated.
With the M Dynamic Mode activated, stabilizing interventions are only carried out
to a reduced degree.<
To maintain vehicle stability, drive with
DSC activated and the M Dynamic Mode
deactivated whenever possible.<
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp goes out shortly
after the engine is started. The indicator lamp lights up continuously:
M Dynamic Mode is activated.
The indicator lamp lights up continuously and
the DSC indicator lamp flashes: the M Dynamic
Mode is active and controls the drive and braking forces.
Activating MDM
You activate the M Dynamic Mode with the
button on the steering wheel, refer to MDrive on
page 53.
With the ignition switched on you can change
the settings of MDrive on the Control Display.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "MDrive" and press the controller.
4. Select "DSC" and press the controller.
At a glance
Controls
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking. This system exploits all of the benefits provided by ABS.
Driving tips
Brake assistant
The M Dynamic Mode is deactivated each time
the engine is started.
Navigation
This system controls the brake system's application pressure at the rear wheels to ensure
stable deceleration.
lute driving limit is reached. Steering corrections by the driver may also be required in this
driving state.
Communications Entertainment
Electronic brake-force distribution
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
The M Dynamic Mode is a mode of the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control. It enables driving
with greater longitudinal and lateral acceleration on dry road surfaces, however with limited
vehicle stability. The system does not provide
stabilizing intervention by reducing the engine
output and braking at the wheels until the abso-
Mobility
M Dynamic Mode MDM
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
5. Select "M Dynamic Mode" and press the
controller.
Press the DSC OFF button; the DSC indicator
lamp lights up continuously. DSC and MDM are
deactivated.
A message appears on the Control Display.
Please note any supplementary information
that appears there.
Manual transmission*:
Press and hold the MDM button.
Under unfavorable traction conditions, the
engine output may be briefly reduced even
when DSC is deactivated.
Reactivating DSC
Press the DSC OFF button; the indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster goes out.
You can also activate and deactivate DSC with
the
button on the steering wheel, refer to
MDrive on page 53.
Manual transmission*:
You can also activate and deactivate the
M Dynamic Mode with the MDM button.
Reactivating MDM
Press the button on the steering wheel or the
MDM button* again; the MDM indicator lamp
goes out.
Activating DSC*
To maintain vehicle stability, drive with
the system activated whenever possible.<
When rocking free or starting off from deep
snow or on loose road surfaces, it can be useful
to briefly deactivate DSC.
Press the MDM button.
Malfunction in driving stability control
systems
The warning lamp for the brake system
lights up, together with the indicator
lamps for ABS, DSC and Tire Pressure
Monitor or Flat Tire Monitor. A message appears on the Control Display.
The driving stability control systems
have failed. Conventional braking efficiency remains available without limitations. While you may continue, you
should remember to proceed cautiously and drive defensively while avoiding full
brake applications. The Tire Pressure Monitor
or the Flat Tire Monitor is also malfunctioning.
Have the system checked as soon as possible.
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
"Sport" program
Select the "Sport" program if you want a consistently sporty coordination of shock absorbers and steering.
At a glance
Display of the previously described
malfunction on Canadian models.
Sequential Manual Transmission with Drivelogic:
EDC Electronic Damping
Control
The concept
If the influencing variables such as road surface
quality or operating conditions such as steering, braking etc. change, the damping automatically adjusts to the new conditions within a
fraction of a second.
You can choose from three programs.
"Comfort" program
Select the "Comfort" program if you want comfort-oriented coordination of shock absorbers
and steering.
Press the EDC button repeatedly:
> "Comfort": LED off.
> "Normal": one LED lights up.
> "Sport": both LEDs light up.
The last selected program is active each time
the engine is started.
You can also activate your preferred program
with the
button on the steering wheel, refer
to MDrive on page 53.
"Normal" program
The "Normal" program offers a balanced mixture of the comfort and the sport program.
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
Display of the previously described
malfunction on Canadian models.
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Manual transmission:
Reference
The brake system warning lamp lights
up yellow. A message appears on the
Control Display. The brake assistant is
defective. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Driving tips
The DSC warning lamp lights up.
A malfunction has occurred in DSC
including MDM. The stability maintenance functions are no longer available. The
vehicle remains operational. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Controls
Selecting program
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
FTM Flat Tire Monitor*
With Sequential Manual Transmission via the
button in the center console:
The concept
1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
The Flat Tire Monitor detects a pressure loss in
one tire by comparing the speeds of the individual wheels during driving.
2. Press the button for approx. 5 seconds.
After the button is released, the warning
lamp lights up in yellow for several seconds in the instrument cluster, refer to
Indication of a flat tire. The message "Initializing FTM ..." appears on the Control Display for a few seconds.
In the event of a pressure loss, there is a change
in the rolling circumference and therefore the
rotation speed of the corresponding wheel. The
system detects this change and reports it as a
flat tire.
Functional requirement
To ensure the reliable signaling of a flat tire, the
system must be initialized at the correct tire
inflation pressure.
The initialization must be repeated after
every correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.<
System limits
The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate sudden
severe tire damage caused by outside factors
and does not detect a natural, even pressure
drop in all four tires.
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
3. Start to drive.
The initialization finishes during driving
without feedback.
Via iDrive, for operating principle refer to
page 16:
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
> Driving on snow-covered or slippery roads
> Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration
> Driving with snow chains*
Initializing system
The initialization finishes during driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is automatically continued.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains*.<
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
3. Repair flat tire with M Mobility System, refer
to page 218, or replace the damaged wheel,
refer to Changing wheels on page 220.
At a glance
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "FTM" is selected and press
the controller.
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics, otherwise fault-free operation of the system is not
ensured.
Reset the system again after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
System limits
The message "resetting FTM …" is displayed for a few seconds. The warning lamp
in the instrument cluster lights up yellow for
a few seconds.
9. Start to drive.
The initialization finishes during driving
without feedback.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamp lights up in red. A
message appears on the Control Display. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle carefully. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Identify damaged tire. To do this, check the
tire inflation pressure using the M Mobility
System, refer to Producing tire inflation
pressure on page 219.
TPM cannot announce sudden serious
tire damage caused by external influences.<
The system does not function properly if it has
not been reset, e.g. a flat tire is reported despite
correct tire inflation pressures.
The system is inactive and cannot display a flat
tire if a wheel has been mounted without TPM
electronics, or if TPM is temporarily interfered
with by other systems or devices which use the
same radio frequency.
Driving tips
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Functional requirement
Status display on Control Display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
TPM takes the fact that the tire pressure
changes during driving into account. A correction is only required if requested by TPM with
the color.
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
Reference
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
Navigation
TPM checks the tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system reports when
the tire inflation pressure has dropped considerably in one or several tires.
Communications Entertainment
The concept
Controls
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor*
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
Green
The tire pressure matches the learned set state.
"TPM active" is displayed on the Control Display.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "TPM" is selected and press
the controller.
One wheel is yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire. A message appears on the
Control Display.
All wheels are yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires. A message appears on the Control
Display.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire.
Reasons for this can be:
> TPM is being reset
> Temporary interference due to systems
or devices which use the same radio
frequency
> Malfunction
Resetting system
Reset the system again after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
Resetting finishes during driving, which can be
interrupted at any time. When driving resumes,
resetting is continued automatically.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
9. Start to drive.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After a few minutes of driving, the set tire inflation pressures in the tires are applied as the set
values to be monitored. Resetting finishes during driving. The tires are shown in green on the
Control Display.
If a flat tire is detected during resetting
and applying the tire inflation pressures,
all tires are shown in yellow on the Control Display. The message "Tire low!" is displayed.<
Message with low tire inflation
pressure
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A
message appears on the Control Display. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. The tires
are shown in gray on the Control Display and a message is displayed. No flat tire can
be detected.
A message like this is displayed in the following
situations:
> In case of a malfunction;
have the system checked.
> If a wheels is mounted without TPM electronics.
> If TPM is temporarily interfered with by
other systems or devices which use the
same radio frequency.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Systems
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure indicator. When the
system detects a malfunction, the indicator will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check
the TPMS malfunction indicator after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Each tire, including the spare*, should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Have the tire replaced by a BMW center or a
workshop informed on handling TPM which
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.
Navigation
The spare tire* is equipped with the necessary
TPC electronics and is also monitored after
mounting and after resetting the system.
Communications Entertainment
3. Repairing flat tire with M Mobility System,
refer to page 218, or replace the damaged
wheel or wheels, refer to Changing wheels*
on page 220.
Mobility
2. If all four wheels are shown in yellow, identify the damaged tire on the vehicle.
pressure monitoring system, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure indicator when one or
more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure indicator illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and
stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is
not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure indicator.
Reference
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle carefully. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
Brake force display
> On the left: normal braking.
> On the right: heavy braking.
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1
Front airbags
2
Coupe: Head airbags
3
Side airbags
4
Knee airbag
5
Knee airbag
Protective action
To ensure that the safety systems continue to provide optimized protection,
please follow the adjustment instructions on
page 45.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of a side impact. The relevant side airbag supports the side upper body area.
The head airbag supports the head. The knee
airbag protects the legs from colliding with the
cockpit.
The airbags are deliberately not triggered in
every impact situation, e.g. less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way. Do not attempt to
remove the airbag restraint system from the
vehicle. Do not modify or tamper with either the
wiring or the individual components in the airbag system. This category includes the upholstery in the center of the steering wheel, on the
instrument panel, the side trim panels on the
doors and on the Coupe, the roof pillars along
with the sides of the headliner. Do not attempt
to remove or dismantle the steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components
directly after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Operating state of front passenger
airbags
At a glance
from below. Otherwise, a correct evaluation of
the occupied seat surface cannot be ensured.<
Controls
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of airbag generators carried out only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with appropriately trained
personnel and has the required explosives
licenses. Otherwise unprofessional attempts to
service the system could lead to failure in an
emergency or undesired airbag triggering,
either of which could result in personal injury.<
Before transporting a child in the front
passenger seat, read the safety information and follow the instructions under Transporting children safely, refer to page 56.
The front, knee and side airbags on the front
passenger side can be deactivated for teenagers and adults in certain sitting positions; the
indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags
lights up when this occurs. In these cases,
change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator
lamp goes out. If the desired status cannot be
produced by changing the sitting position,
transport the corresponding person in the rear
seat.
Do not fit seat covers, seat cushion padding,
beaded mats or other items onto the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not place objects under
the seat which could press against the seat
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a child restraint system intended for the
purpose is properly detected on the seat.
The front, knee and side airbags on the front
passenger side are deactivated.
Most child seats are detected by the system. Especially the child seats required
by the NHTSA at the time the vehicle is manufactured. After installing a child seat, make sure
that the indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags lights up. This indicates that the child
seat has been detected and the front passenger
airbags are not activated.<
> The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient height is detected on the seat.
The front, knee and side airbags on the front
passenger side are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up when
the seat is empty.
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation
Communications Entertainment
The current status of the front passenger
airbags, i.e. deactivated or activated, is
indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior
rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front
passenger airbags below.<
The indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags indicates the operating status of the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side depending on whether the seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether the
front passenger airbags are activated or deactivated.
Mobility
The occupation of the seat is detected by evaluating the impression on the occupied seat surface of the front passenger seat. The system
correspondingly activates or deactivates the
front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side.
The illustration here shows a possible arrangement in the Coupe. With some vehicle equipment packages or in the Convertible, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.
Reference
Automatic deactivation of front
passenger airbags
Driving tips
Warnings and information on the airbags is also
provided on the sun visors.
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
But the front, knee and side airbags on the
front passenger side are still deactivated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
severity of the accident, the belt tensioner and
the multistage airbag restraint system.<
Lowering
If the rollover protection system experienced no
impact after automatic activation, then it can be
lowered again. No tools are necessary for this
purpose.
1. Press the release backward and hold in that
position.
From radio readiness, refer to page 59, the
warning lamp lights up briefly, indicating the
operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the safety belt tensioners.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up as of radio
readiness.
> Warning lamp lights up continuously.
Have the airbag system checked immediately in case of a malfunction; otherwise,
there is a danger that the airbag system may not
respond in the expected manner in an accident
despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<
2. Press the rollover protection unit halfway
down from above.
3. Let go of the release.
4. Press the rollover protection unit down until
it snaps into place.
Convertible: rollover
protection system
The rollover protection system is automatically
activated in the event of an accident or a critical
driving situation, extreme inclination on the longitudinal axis, or loss of ground contact. The
rollover bars located behind the rear head
restraints are deployed within fractions of a second.
As a supplement to the rollover bar integrated
into the windshield frame, the rollover protection system ensures that all vehicle occupants
have the necessary headroom.
Always keep the path of movement of the
rollover protection system clear.
In less severe accidents, you are protected by
the fastened safety belt and, depending on the
5. Use the same procedure for the second rollover protection unit.
Have the rollover protection system checked
after unexpected triggering.
Never move the convertible top when the
rollover protection system is raised.
No changes of any nature may be made to the
individual components of the rollover protection system and wiring.
Work on the rollover protection system may
only be performed at a BMW center.
Unprofessional attempts to service the system
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Head-Up Display*
7. Select desired information of Head-Up Display.
6. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Head-Up Display"
is selected and press the controller.
The concept
The M view for the Head-Up Display can also be
selected with the
button on the steering
wheel, refer to MDrive on page 53.
The settings are stored for the remote key currently in use.
Default view
Switching on/off
Press the button.
Communications Entertainment
8. Press the controller.
The information is shown on the HeadUp Display.
"M View": the M view appears in the
Head-Up Display.
Information unavailable in the M view
appears on the Control Display in gray and
cannot be selected.
"M View": the default view is displayed.
Navigation
Driving tips
With the Head-Up Display, important information is projected into the driver's field of view,
e.g. navigation instructions. This enables you to
absorb this information without looking away
from the road.
At a glance
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Head-Up Display" is
selected and press the controller.
Controls
can lead to failure or malfunction.
For a system check and to ensure long-term
functioning, you must comply with the maintenance intervals of the service requirements,
refer to page 72.<
Selecting displays
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
1
Navigation instructions
4. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
2
Stored desired speed of cruise control
3
Speed
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
Mobility
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
"M view"
6. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Brightness" is
selected and press the controller.
1
Current engine speed, highlighted
2
Advance warning field of tachometer
3
Red warning field of tachometer, also refer
to Tachometer on page 69
7. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
4
Speed
5
Gear display
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
For information on the shift lights in the
tachometer, refer to page 64.
Setting brightness
The brightness of the display is automatically
adapted to the ambient lighting conditions.
However, you can change the base setting.
With the low beams switched on, the brightness
can also be adjusted with the knurled wheel of
the instrument lighting.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Head-Up Display" is
selected and press the controller.
Notes
The visibility of the displays in the Head-Up Display is influenced by:
> Sunglasses with certain polarization filters
> Certain sitting positions
> Objects on the cover of the Head-Up Display
> Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting
conditions
If the image is distorted, please have the base
setting checked at a BMW center.
Specialized windshield
The windshield is a part of the system. The
shape of the windshield complies with the
requirements of the Head-Up Display to enable
a precise display. A film in the windshield prevents double images from being displayed.
Windshield replacement should be carried out
by a BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Only clean the cover of the Head-Up Display with a soft, nonabrasive cloth or with
a display cleaning cloth; otherwise, you may
damage it.<
Driving tips
Controls
You can find everything you need to know on
this topic by consulting the Caring for your vehicle brochure.
At a glance
Care instructions
Lamps
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
Automatic headlamp control
In switch position 3, the system activates the
low beams and switches them on or off in
response to changes in ambient light conditions, for instance, in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk
and in case of precipitation. Adaptive Head
Light* is active. The LED next to the symbol is
illuminated when the low beams are on.
0
Lights off and daytime running lamps*
1
Parking lamps and daytime running lamps*
2
Low beams and welcome lamps
3
Automatic headlamp control, daytime running lamps*, welcome lamps, Adaptive
Head Light* and high-beam assistant*
If you open the driver's door with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off when the light switch is in
position 2 or 3.
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps drain the battery. Do
not leave them switched on for long periods of time, otherwise it may no longer be possible to start the engine. It is preferable to
switch on the roadside parking lamps on one
side, refer to page 98.<
Low beams
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
You can activate the daytime running lamps,
refer to page 97. In the situations named above,
the system then automatically switches over to
the low beams.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the sensors
cannot detect fog of hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low beams manually under these conditions.<
Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3
when parking the vehicle, then when you unlock
the vehicle, the parking lamps and interior lighting remain illuminated for a brief time.
Activating/deactivating welcome
lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
6. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the
controller.
7. Turn the controller to select the desired
duration.
At a glance
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Lighting" is selected and
press the controller.
Daytime running lamps*
6. Select "Welcome light" and press the controller.
The welcome lamps are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
The daytime running lamps light up in position 0, 1 and 3. If the light switch remains in
position 1, the parking lamps light up after the
ignition is switched off.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lamps*
1. Open the start menu.
Driving tips
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Controls
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Lighting" is selected and
press the controller.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Lighting" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Daytime running lamps" and press
the controller.
Communications Entertainment
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
When you activate the headlamp flasher after
parking the vehicle and switching off the lamps,
the low beams will come on for a brief period.
You can set the duration or deactivate the function via iDrive.
Navigation
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Pathway lighting
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Mobility
The daytime running lamps are
switched on.
Lamps
Adaptive Head Light*
Switching off
The concept
Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction
up to the resistance point, arrow 3.
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
Activating Adaptive Head Light
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch into position 3, refer to page 96.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Head Light is not active when driving in reverse
and points toward the passenger side when the
vehicle is stopped.
High beams/
roadside parking lamps
High-beam assistant*
The concept
This system automatically switches the high
beams on and off. A sensor on the front side of
the inside rearview mirror controls the process.
The assistant makes sure that the high beams
are switched on whenever traffic conditions
permit. This relieves you of the burden of constantly switching back and forth and simultaneously provides you with the best possible visibility. Naturally, you can intervene at any time to
switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating system
1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to
page 96.
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly
press the turn signal lever in the high-beam
direction.
1
High beams
2
Headlamp flasher
3
Roadside parking lamps
Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one
side of your vehicle when parking:
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the resistance point, arrow 3.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the high-beam
assistant is activated. The system
automatically switches between high beams
and low beams, reacting to oncoming traffic,
vehicles ahead of you, and sufficiently lit areas,
e.g. in built-up zones.
The roadside parking lamps drain the battery. Do not leave them switched on for
long periods of time, otherwise it may no longer
be possible to start the engine.<
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
> When the low beams are on, use the headlamp flasher as usual.
System limits
The high-beam assistant is designed to
maximize the amount of time that high
beams can be safely used and to quickly switch
back to low beams when traffic approaches.
The system cannot completely replace driver
intervention when unusual conditions are
encountered. For this reason, switch to low
beams when circumstances so dictate. Failure
to do so can pose a safety risk.<
Below are a few examples of situations in which
the system may not react or may only function
to a limited degree, requiring personal intervention:
> in extremely unfavorable weather conditions such as fog or heavy precipitation
> in sensing road users with poor inherent
illumination such as pedestrians, cyclists,
equestrians, horsedrawn vehicles, railroad
or shipping traffic close to the road, and at
deer crossings
Moreover, no system can operate without limitations. High-beam assistant operation is subject to conditions that may reduce the system's
ability to recognize the difference between
actual vehicle head lamps or tail lamps and, for
example, highly reflective signs, markers, and
streetlights. To be on the safe side, the system
may periodically interpret these situations as
conditions that require low beams. Below are
some of the situations in which premature
switching to low beams can occur:
> approaching large and/or highly reflective
signs
> approaching certain lights, such as driveway lighting and porch lights
> approaching certain traffic signals
> approaching large reflective markers
In these situations, the system may interpret
the above conditions as a vehicle ahead requiring a switch to low beams. When the conditions
return to normal, the system will reactivate the
high beams.
The high-beam assistant cannot replace the
driver's responsibility for complying with state
laws on high-beam switching or for adapting to
visibility and traffic conditions.
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
> when the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor
on the front side of the inside rearview mirror with a cloth slightly moistened with glass
cleaner
Driving tips
> when the windshield is fogged up, dirty or
covered with stickers, decals etc. in the area
of the inside rearview mirror
Navigation
> If the high-beam assistant has switched on
the low beams, but you wish to use the high
beams, simply switch on the high beams as
usual. This deactivates the system and it is
up to you to switch back to low beams.
In order to reactivate the system, briefly
press the turn signal lever in the high-beam
direction.
> in the low speed range
Communications Entertainment
> If the high-beam assistant has switched on
the high beams, but you wish to use the low
beams, just switch on the low beams with
the turn signal lever. This deactivates the
high-beam assistant.
In order to reactivate the system, briefly
press the turn signal lever in the high-beam
direction.
> in poorly illuminated areas and in the presence of highly reflective signs
Mobility
If you wish or the situation requires, you can
intervene at any time.
> in tight curves, on steep crests or dips, with
cross-traffic, or with partially hidden
oncoming traffic on divided highways
Reference
Manually switching between high
beams and low beams
Lamps
Switching off via iDrive
Interior lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Lighting" is selected and
press the controller.
Control of the interior lamps, footwell lamps,
door entry lighting, courtesy lamps and sill
panel lighting is automatic.
With the courtesy lamps, LED lights are located
in the door handles to illuminate the exterior
area before the doors.
To protect the battery, all lamps in the
vehicle are switched off approx. 15 minutes after radio readiness is switched off, refer
to Start/Stop button on page 59.<
6. Select "High-beam assistant" and press
the controller.
High-beam assistant is switched off.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Instrument lighting
Switching interior lamps on and off
manually
Press button 1.
If the interior lamps, footwell lamps, door entry
lighting, courtesy lamps and sill panel lighting
are to remain switched off continually, press the
button for approx. 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
The reading lamps are beside the interior lamp:
You can turn them on and off using buttons 2
located next to the lamps.
The lighting intensity can be adjusted with the
knurled wheel with the parking lamps/low
beams switched on.
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Climate
8
AUTO program
9
Switching cooling function on and off
manually
1
Air directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2
Air for the upper body area, refer to
Ventilation on page 105
3
Air to footwell
4
Temperature, left side of passenger
compartment
11 Manual air distribution, front passenger side
5
Manual air distribution, driver's side
6
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
13 AUC automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated air mode
7
Manual air volume, switching off automatic
climate control, residual heat utilization
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Driving tips
Controls
Automatic climate control
14 LED for residual heat utilization and
parked-car ventilation system
15 Rear window defroster
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
12 Maximum cooling
Mobility
10 Temperature, right side of passenger
compartment
Climate
16 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed
3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the
controller.
The current setting for air distribution is displayed on the Control Display.
A congenial climate
The AUTO program offers the optimum air distribution and air volume for virtually all conditions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you
only need to select an interior temperature that
you find pleasant.
The following sections contain more detailed
information on the available setting options.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile
settings on page 29.
4. Select the desired intensity and press the
controller.
The marked intensity of the automatic
program is switched on.
Convertible program*
AUTO program
The AUTO program handles the
adjustment of air volume and air
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, in the direction of
the upper body and in the footwell.
It also adapts your instructions for the temperature to outside influences throughout the year.
The cooling is switched on automatically with
the AUTO program. At the same time, a condensation sensor controls the program in such
a way that window condensation is prevented
as much as possible.
Intensity of AUTO program
You can adjust the intensity of the AUTO program by repeatedly pressing the AUTO button.
The respective current setting is briefly displayed on the Control Display when the button
is pressed.
You can also adjust the intensity of the AUTO
program via iDrive.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".
When the convertible top is opened, the convertible program can also be selected. In the
convertible program, the automatic climate
control is optimized for driving with the convertible top open. In addition, the air volume is
increased as the speed increases.
If the convertible program has been selected,
it is automatically active every time the top is
opened.
The effect of the convertible program can
be greatly enhanced if the wind deflector
is installed.<
Temperature
Set the desired temperature individually on the driver's and front
passenger side.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as quickly as possible at any time of year, if necessary with the
maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then
keeps it constant.
When switching between different temperature settings in rapid succession, the
automatic climate control does not have sufficient time to achieve the set temperature.<
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
1. Press the button to display the current setting on the Control Display.
2. Select the field by moving the controller and
adjust the temperature by turning the controller.
The rear window defroster
switches off automatically after a
certain amount of time.
Convertible: the rear window defroster is only
activated when the rear window is closed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, upper
wires are used as an antenna and are not part of
the rear window defroster.
Air volume, manual
You can adjust the air volume by
turning. You can reactivate the
automatic mode for the air volume
with the AUTO button.
The air quantity is reduced and if need be, the
ventilation is switched off in order to reduce the
load on the battery. The display stays the same.
You can also adjust the temperature in the
upper body region with iDrive.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Climate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the controller.
4. Select the field by moving the controller and
adjust the temperature by turning the controller.
Air distribution, manual
You can route the air flowing out into the vehicle
interior via various programs, separately for the
driver's and passenger's side:
> Upper body region
> Upper body region and footwell
> Footwell
> Driver's side: windows and footwell
> Individual program
At a glance
Controls
Rear window defroster
Driving tips
Quickly remove ice and condensation from the windshield and front
side windows.
To do this, also switch on the cooling function.
Navigation
Adapting temperature in upper body
region
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Communications Entertainment
In the highest setting you activate the maximum
heating output, regardless of the outside temperature.
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Press the button repeatedly until
the desired air distribution of the
respective program is shown on
the Control Display.
Mobility
Selecting program
Climate
Adjusting air distribution individually –
individual program
Your settings are stored in this program.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Climate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the controller.
The driver's and front passenger side can
be adjusted separately with the fields on the
right or left side.
4. Select the driver's or front passenger side if
necessary.
Move the controller to the right or left
repeatedly until the driver's side or front
passenger side is selected.
5. Select the desired field by moving the controller.
6. Turn the controller to adjust the air distribution.
Switching cooling function on and off
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before reheating it as needed
according to the temperature setting. This
function is only available when the engine is
running.
The cooling function helps to avoid condensation on the window surfaces or to quickly
remove them.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automatically with the AUTO program.
Maximum cooling
Maximally cooled air is obtained as
quickly as possible at an outside
temperature above approx. 327/
06 and with the engine running.
At the lowest temperature, the automatic climate control switches into recirculating air
mode. The maximum air volume flows out of the
vents for the upper body. It is therefore necessary for these vents to be open for maximum
cooling.
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control/recirculated-air mode
Driver's side:
1
Air directed toward the windshield and side
windows
2
Air for the upper body
3
Air to footwell
Front passenger side:
4
Air for the upper body
5
Air to footwell
Pressing the AUTO button cancels the
manual air distribution settings.<
The automatic mode for the air volume remains
effective with manual air distribution.
You can respond to unpleasant
odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily
suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the
vehicle. In AUC mode, a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shut-off
automatically.
Press the button repeatedly to run through the
following control sequence:
> LED off: outside air flows into the vehicle
continuously.
> Right LED on, AUC mode: the system
detects pollutants in the outside air and
responds by blocking the supply of outside
air when required.
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
The heat stored in the engine is
used to heat the passenger compartment, e.g. while stopped at a
school to pick up a child.
1. Switch off the engine.
2. Turn to the right, refer to arrow.
The function can be switched on when the following conditions are met:
> up to 15 minutes after switching off the
engine
1
Knurled wheels for smoothly opening and
closing vent outlets
2
Levers for changing the airflow direction
Do not drop any foreign objects into the
vent outlets; otherwise, they could be catapulted outwards and cause injuries.<
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, for instance, if the interior
has become too warm, etc.
> engine at operating temperature
Draft-free ventilation
> sufficient battery voltage
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and is not directed straight at you.
> at an outside temperature below 777/
25 6
With the ignition lock at radio readiness or
higher the interior temperature, the air volume
and the air distribution can be set.
Switching automatic climate control on
and off
At a glance
Ventilation for cooling
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter
provides additional protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW
center replaces this combined filter as a standard part of your scheduled maintenance.
You can have more detailed information shown
on the Control Display, refer to page 72.
Navigation
Residual heat
Controls
Should the windows fog up in the recirculated-air mode, press the AUTO button or
switch off the recirculated-air mode and
increase the air volume if necessary.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
over a longer period of time, as the air quality
inside the vehicle deteriorates continuously.<
Driving tips
Ventilation
Communications Entertainment
> Left LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is shut
off continuously.
You switch on the system again by pressing any
button of the automatic climate control.
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
2. After approx. 1 second, turn to the left
again.
Mobility
1. Turn to the left to minimum air volume.
Climate
Parked car ventilation
The parked car ventilation is switched on.
The
symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes.
The concept
The parked car ventilation blows air into the
passenger compartment to lower interior temperatures.
Preselecting activation times
It is ready to use in the parked-car mode at any
outside temperature.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".
You can set two different times for the system
to start. The parked car ventilation can also be
switched on and off directly. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
electrical current, you should refrain from activating it twice in succession without allowing
the battery to be recharged in normal operation
between uses.
5. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".
1. Open the start menu.
4. Select "Activation time" and press the controller.
The air emerges through the upper body region
vent outlets in the instrument panel. Therefore,
please open the vent outlets.
The parked car ventilation system is operated
via iDrive.
Switching on and off directly
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
6. Select the time and press the controller.
The first time setting is selected.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press
the controller.
7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next adjustment is selected.
9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the time is stored.
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes when the parked car
ventilation has switched on.
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Communications Entertainment
The parked car ventilation is only available for activation within the subsequent
24 hours. Please reactivated it after this time.<
Navigation
The switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control lights up.
Driving tips
Controls
Move the controller to the left or right to select
"Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and then press the controller.
At a glance
Activating timer
Practical interior accessories
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*
Programming
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmitters for various remote-controlled accessories,
such as garage and gate or lighting systems.
The integrated universal remote control registers and stores signals from the original handheld transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three memory buttons 1. After this, the programmed
memory button 1 will operate the system in
question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm transmission of the signal.
If you sell your vehicle one day, delete the saved
programs beforehand for your own security,
refer to page 109.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the integrated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no people, animals or objects are within the travel
range of the device. Also, comply with the
safety precautions of the original hand-held
transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If you see this symbol on the packaging
or in the manual supplied with the original hand-held transmitter, it is safe to
assume that it is compatible with the integrated
universal remote control.
If you have additional questions, please
contact your BMW center or call:
1-800-355-3515.
Information is also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of
Johnson Controls, Inc.<
1
Memory buttons
2
LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 59.
2. When using for the first time: press the left
and right-hand memory button 1 for approx.
20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes quickly.
All stored programs are deleted.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/
30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the memory buttons 1 depends on the particular
system of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on
the original hand-held transmitter and the
desired memory button 1 on the integrated
universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes
slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2
does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat the step.
5. To program other original hand-held transmitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the device when the engine is
running or when the ignition is switched on.
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Press the left and right-hand memory button 1
for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes.
All stored programs are deleted.
Programs cannot be deleted individually.
3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the command button of
the original hand-held transmitter. As soon
as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both
buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly
after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat the step.
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled equipment.
Glove compartment
Opening
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in Fixed-code
hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
equipment to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1
of the integrated universal remote control
three times.
Press the button. The glove compartment
opens automatically and the lamps come on.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
To prevent injury in the event of an accident while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
If you have any additional questions,
please contact your BMW center.<
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the equipment to be set. You will find information there on the possibilities for synchronization.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please observe
the following supplementary instructions:
Navigation
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the
integrated universal remote.
Communications Entertainment
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the memory buttons 1 depends on the particular
system of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
Mobility
1. Hold the original handheld remote control
approx. 10 to 30 cm away from the memory
buttons 1.
Controls
Rememorizing individual programs
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
At a glance
Deleting all stored programs
Reference
If the device fails to function even after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmitter or hold down the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote
control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal
remote control flashes rapidly for a short time
and then remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this
indicates that the original hand-held transmitter
uses an alternating-code system. In the case of
an alternating-code system, program the memory buttons 1 as described at Alternating-code
hand-held transmitters.<
Practical interior accessories
Closing
Connection for external audio device
Raise the lid into the closed position.
A connection for an external audio device is
located in the storage compartment. You can,
for example, connect a CD player or an MP3
player, and play the sound via the vehicle loudspeakers, refer to page 170
Rechargeable flashlight*
The flashlight is located on the left side of the
glove compartment.
The flashlight can remain there continuously.
Remove the flashlight from the socket when
needed.
Be sure that the flashlight is switched off
when it is inserted into its socket. Failure
to comply with this precaution could lead to
overcharging and damage.<
Center armrest
Adjusting height
The center armrest can be set in two positions.
Pull the right button:
Move the armrest upward or downward and
lock it in the desired position.
Storage compartments
Storage compartments in the
passenger compartment
Storage compartment behind center
armrest
A storage compartment is located in the armrest between the front seats. This compartment
is integrated into the central locking system and
can also be locked separately using the hotel
function, refer to page 33.
To open the cover:
Pull the left button. The cover opens and can be
folded upward.
Depending on the version, the storage compartment can be equipped with a corresponding cradle* for the telephone or mobile phone.
To open, raise the cover at the left or right edge.
The compartment contains the cup holder and
the lock for the hotel function, refer to page 33.
Other compartments and nets
Other compartments are provided in the doors
as well as in the front center console*.
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
To prevent the risk of injury during an
accident, do not stow hard or sharpedged items in the nets.<
Storage compartments in the luggage
compartment
> Storage compartment in the right side trim
panel, which is also suitable, if you so
desire, for accommodating the vehicle literature.
The compartment of the rear center console
contains a built-in cup holder and a removable
one.
Driving tips
You have the following storage options in the
luggage compartment:
Controls
Ticket pockets are located in the sun visors.
Storage nets are located on the backrests of the
front seats and in the passenger footwell*.
> Net at the loading lip for smaller items.
Opening
When hanging clothing on the hooks,
ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks.
If you do so, they could cause personal injury to
occupants during braking or evasive maneuvers.<
Press the trim strip of the cover.
Emptying
Cup holders
Use lightweight, unbreakable containers
and do not transport hot beverages. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident. Do not force unsuitable
containers into the cup holders, as otherwise
damage can result.<
Press the opened cover beyond the resistance
point, refer to arrow: the ashtray lifts up for
removal.
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
To fold down, press at the top edge.
Mobility
Ashtray
Reference
The removable cup holder can be inserted into
the side of the center console.
Navigation
Coupe: clothes hooks
Practical interior accessories
Cigarette lighter
Ski bag*
The ski bag permits safe and clean transport of
up to two pairs of standard skis or one snowboard.
You can use the ski bag to stow skis up to 6.9 ft/
2.10 m long.
Loading
1. Press the button downward and pull the
filler element forward.
Press in the lighter with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for
example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<
Connecting electrical devices
Socket
2. Extend the ski bag between the front seats.
The zipper gives you easy access to stowed
items and facilitates drying of the ski bag.
3. Press the button in the luggage compartment.
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a
power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum
cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to
approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the
socket by inserting plugs of different shapes or
sizes.
In front passenger footwell
4. Open the loading flap and use the magnetic
holder to secure it to the rear panel.
To stow the ski bag, perform the above steps in
reverse order.
Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges so that no damage occurs.
Access to the socket:
Fold open the cover.
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
At a glance
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Communications Entertainment
Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to
do so, it could endanger vehicle occupants during braking or evasive maneuvers.
To refit the filler element, insert the two tabs at
the bottom into the strip and press the filler element back into place. Make sure that you do not
damage the rear seat upholstery.<
Driving tips
After loading, secure the ski bag and its contents. To do so, tighten the retaining belt at the
buckle.
Navigation
Securing cargo
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
This section is designed to provide you
with extra support by supplying information
useful in dealing with specific driving
and operating conditions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving
Breaking-in
Moving parts need time to adjust to one
another. To ensure that your vehicle continues
to provide optimized economy of operation
throughout an extended service life, we request
that you devote careful attention to the following section.
Do not use the driving programs 5 and 6, refer
to Drivelogic on page 63, during break-in.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during
this break-in period.
Clutch
Always obey all official speed limits.
The function of the clutch is only at its optimized level after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. With manual transmission:
During this break-in period, engage the clutch
gently.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Following part replacement
Drive at changing engine and driving speeds,
however do not exceed 5,500 rpm or 105 mph/
170 km/h.
Observe the break-in instructions again if components mentioned above must be replaced
after subsequent driving operation.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kick-down mode during these
initial miles.
General driving notes
Engine and differential
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km to
3,000 miles/5,000 km
The engine and driving speeds can gradually be
increased up to a continuous vehicle speed of
135 mph/220 km/h. Only drive at top speed
briefly, e.g. when passing.
Transmission
The function of the transmission is only at its
optimized level after driving a distance of
approx. 300 miles/500 km. Do not exceed
engine speeds of 5,500 rpm during this time.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Ground clearance
Ensure that sufficient ground clearance
is available. To drive down curbs, select
the "Sport" program of the EDC Electronic
Damping Control, refer to page 85, to keep the
ground clearance as uniform as possible. Otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.<
Closing luggage compartment lid
Only drive with the luggage compartment
lid completely closed, otherwise exhaust
can penetrate into the passenger compartment.<
If it is absolutely necessary to drive with the luggage compartment lid open:
1. Coupe: close both windows.
Convertible: with closed top, close all windows.
2. Increase the air volume of the automatic climate control to a high level, refer to
page 103.
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Hydroplaning
On a slippery surface
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning, and is characterized by a partial or
complete loss of contact between the tires and
the road surface, ultimately undermining your
ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<
1. Select "P 400" program of M Engine
Dynamic Control, refer to page 64.
Driving through water
Do not drive through water on the road if it
is deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only at
walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Starting off
On slopes
The starting assistant enables you to start off
conveniently on slopes. The handbrake is not
required for this purpose.
1. Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.
2. Release the footbrake and drive off quickly.
The starting assistant holds the vehicle
for approx. 1 second after releasing the
footbrake. After releasing the footbrake, drive
off quickly, otherwise the starting assistant no
Clutch protection with manual
transmission
Be sure to avoid riding the clutch for longer periods.
Your BMW M6 is equipped with an overload
protection for the clutch. Riding the clutch for
longer periods is detected and the engine management system limits the engine speed to protect the clutch. This can result in the vehicle failing to accelerate when the clutch pedal is
partially depressed.
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. In situations that require it, it is best to
brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
The pulsing of he brake pedal indicates that the
ABS is controlling braking.
In certain braking situations the perforated
brake rotors can cause operating noises which,
however, have not effect on the performance
and operating safety of the brake system.
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Navigation
2. Gently press accelerator pedal to prevent
wheels from spinning when starting off.
Communications Entertainment
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread
depth of the tires decreases, also refer to Minimum tire tread on page 205.
Controls
To protect the clutch of the Sequential Manual
Transmission from overheating, the starting-off
behavior is changed under heavy loading, e.g. a
rapid succession of starts on slopes. This can
be noticed from shaking during starting off.
Driving tips
Start off quickly on slopes. Do not hold
the vehicle on a hill by pressing the accelerator, but apply the footbrake or handbrake
instead. Otherwise, overheating and heavy
wear can result in the area of the Sequential
Manual Transmission.<
Mobility
As in all vehicles, extremely high temperatures are generated in the exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to
them. When driving, standing at idle and while
parking, take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it
the risk of serious property damage as well as
personal injury. Do not touch hot exhaust tail
pipes. Otherwise there is a risk of burns.<
longer holds the vehicle after approx. 1 second
and it begins to roll back.<
Reference
Hot exhaust system
Things to remember when driving
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
brake pedal. Even light but consistent
pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures,
brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<
Driving in wet conditions
When driving on wet roads or in heavy rain, it is
a good idea to apply light pressure to the brake
pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions
to ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
This can also lead to long-lasting decreases in
comfort and squeaking noise during braking.
These decreases in comfort can also be produced by long braking maneuvers with a low
pedal pressure.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
For technical information about the brake system, refer to page 121.
When vehicle is parked
Hills
To prevent overheating and thus reduced
efficiency of the brake system, downshift
to a gear in which only minimal brake applications are needed when descending long or
steep downhill stretches. Even light but consistent pressure on the brake pedal can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
Sequential Manual Transmission: do not
drive in idle or with the engine switched
off, otherwise there will be no engine braking
action or support of the braking force and steering.
Manual transmission: do not drive with the
clutch depressed, in idle or with the engine
switched off, otherwise there will be no engine
braking action or support of the braking force
and steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area of movement
of the pedals and impair their operation.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
Condensation forms in the automatic climate
control during operation, and then exits under
the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under
the vehicle are therefore normal.
Before driving into a car wash
Fold in the exterior mirrors, refer to page 51,
otherwise they could be damaged due to the
width of the vehicle.
General information on the care and maintenance of your BMW is contained in the Caring
for your vehicle brochure.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. The ultimate result
can assume the form of a sudden blow-out.<
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo
bay; otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.<
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage
can be transported.
Stowing cargo
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the XXX amount equals
800 lbs. and there will be four 150-lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
200 lbs.:
800 lbs. minus 600 lbs. = 200 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
> Place heavy cargo as far forward and as low
as possible, placing it directly behind the
bulkhead behind the rear seats.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
Securing cargo
> Use the luggage net* or securing straps to
hold down small and lightweight luggage
and cargo.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps* for securing
larger and heavier objects are available at
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX lbs. or YYY kg.
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
Reference
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX lbs. or YYY kg, as otherwise the vehicle
may be damaged and unstable driving conditions may result.<
At a glance
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard*:
Controls
Load
Driving tips
Determining loading limit
Things to remember when driving
your BMW center. Four lashing eyes
mounted in the luggage compartment are
used to secure these heavy-duty cargo
straps, refer to arrows.
> Please observe the special instructions
supplied with the heavy-duty cargo straps.
Position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endanger the vehicle's occupants, for example if sudden braking or evasive maneuvers are necessary.
When fastening lashings, use only the lashing
eyes, refer to illustration; otherwise, the lashings could come loose or you could damage the
vehicle.
Never exceed the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 235, as excessive loads can pose a
safety hazard, and may also put you in violation
of freeway safety laws.
You should never transport unsecured heavy or
hard objects in the passenger compartment, as
they could fly around and pose a safety hazard
to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt braking or evasive maneuvers.<
Pad on base of luggage compartment
You can use the pad as needed, for example to
transport soiled objects. The rubberized side is
washable and has an anti-skid effect.
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Compound brake
With a 305 cu in/5 liter displacement, the highspeed V10 engine generates a maximum output of 373 kW and a maximum torque of
384 lb ft/520 Nm. Its spontaneous response
characteristics yield a very broad usable engine
speed range. At the maximum engine speed of
8250 rpm, the flow of fuel is interrupted in order
to protect the engine. Due to the powerful
engine dynamics, when the vehicle is at rest,
the maximum engine speed is limited to
7000 rpm.
Your BMW M6 has a high-performance brake
system with perforated compound brake rotors.
For additional information on warming up, refer
to Tachometer on page 69 and Engine oil temperature on page 70.
Also refer to Corrosion on brake rotors on
page 118.
Drive train
In your BMW M6, particular importance was
attached to the direct connection of the engine
to the drive system. Due to the torsionally rigid
design of the drive train, the transmission of the
torque is also audible, as is customary in a
sports car. As a result, load shifts can be distinctly audible. This does not in any way impair
the function or the service life of the components.
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation
Communications Entertainment
When the engine is cold, the exhaust system
has a slightly metallic undertone due to the system design.
In order to keep the brake system in optimum
condition, it is useful to put them under load at
regular intervals in accordance with the nature
of the vehicle.
Mobility
The emissions control system causes the
V10 high-output engine to have slightly
rougher running characteristics during its
warm-up phase.
Braking correctly
Reference
Warming up
Due to the special structural features of these
brake rotors, function noises occur during braking, but this has no effect on the performance,
operating safety, and stability of the brakes.
Driving tips
Controls
V10 High Output Engine
At a glance
BMW M6 Engineering
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Starting navigation system
Starting navigation system*
Your navigation system can use satellites to
ascertain the precise position of your vehicle
and guide you reliably to any destination you
enter.
Navigation DVD
The navigation system requires a special navigation DVD. The latest version is available at
your BMW center.
Display in the assistance
window
You can display the route or the current position
in the assistance window. This display remains
visible even if you change to another application.
1. Move the controller to the right to enter the
assistance window.
Inserting navigation DVD
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled
side up. The navigation DVD is pulled in
automatically.
3. Select the desired route view or "Current
position".
2. Wait several seconds for the system to scan
the data from the DVD.
Removing navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is possible that it is blocked. In this case a message is
also shown on the Control Display.
4. Press the controller.
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
If the navigation system suggests a change of
direction, the arrow view is briefly displayed.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
At a glance
Displaying arrow view in map view*
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Languages" is selected and
press the controller.
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
The arrow view appears in the assistance
window.
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
6. Select "Arrow display pop-up instructions"
and press the controller.
Driving tips
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
Controls
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Destination entry
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
among the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Entering destination via voice*, refer to
page 129
> Selecting destination using information,
refer to page 132
> Selecting destination from a list, refer to
Destination list, page 133
> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 134
> Selecting home address, refer to page 136
After selecting your destination you can proceed to start the destination guidance, refer to
page 138.
Entering a destination
manually
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of streets or
towns, refer to page 137. This allows you to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically so that stored names can be
called up quickly.
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Navigation" is selected and
press the controller.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory/direct selection
buttons, refer to page 21.
Enter data only when the vehicle is stationary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any
contradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. If you do not observe this precaution, you can endanger the vehicle occupants
and other road users.<
3. Select "Enter address" and press the controller.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
3. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
The Control Display shows:
> the arrow view or map view during destination guidance
> the destination list when destination guidance is switched off
The system also supports you with the following features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or
city.
> You can skip the entry of country and town/
city if the current entries are being retained
for your new destination.
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
1. Select "State / Province" or the displayed
country and press the controller.
4. Enter additional letters if necessary.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
The list of available countries appears on
the display.
Navigation
1. Select "Town / City" or the displayed town/
city and press the controller.
2. Select the first letter and press the controller.
A list of all towns/cities starting with this letter appears on the Control Display.
3. To delete the letter entered if necessary:
Entering town/city of destination via
zip code
1. Select "Town / City" and press the controller.
2. Enter the zip code:
Select the individual digits and press the
controller.
> Delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select
and press the controller.
> Delete all digits or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select
and press the controller
longer.
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
Entering destination via town/city
name
Mobility
In order to be able to start the destination guidance, at least the town/city of the destination or
its zip code must be entered.
5. Change to the third field from the top if necessary. Turn the controller until the town/
city name is selected from the list and press
the controller.
Reference
2. Select the country of destination and press
the controller.
Driving tips
Controls
> Enter a blank space if necessary:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
At a glance
Selecting country
Destination entry
> Enter a blank space:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
> Delete individual digits or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select
and press the controller.
> Delete all digits or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select
and press the controller
longer.
3. Select the zip code and press the controller.
The corresponding town/city of destination
is displayed.
4. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until the town/city of
destination is selected and press the controller.
Entering a street without entering
town/city of destination
You can also enter a street without entering a
destination. In this case all streets of the
entered country are offered for selection. The
related town/city is displayed after the street
name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can
undo this entry. This may be practical if the
desired street does not exist in the entered
town/city of destination, because, for example,
it belongs to another part of the town/city.
1. Change to upper field.
The
arrow is selected.
Entering street, house number and
intersection
After the street you can also enter the intersection or the house number.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street and
press the controller.
2. Turn the controller to the right until the
request for the entry of a street in the country appears and press the controller.
2. Enter the street.
The street is entered in exactly the same
way as the town/city of destination.
3. Change to the second field from the top and
enter the street.
The intersection is entered in the same way as
the street.
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
2. {Enter address}
1. Select "House number" and press the controller.
Selecting country
1. Wait for the system to ask for the country of
destination.
2. Say the name of the country of destination.
Say the name of the country of destination in
the language of the voice command system.
Entering town/city of destination
The town/city of destination can be spelled or
entered as an entire word.
> Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.
Destination guidance starts immediately.
> If destination guidance is not to be started
immediately:
Select "Add to destination list" and press
the controller.
The destination is stored in the destination
list, refer to page 133.
Entering destination via
voice*
You can enter a desired destination via the
voice command system. When entering the
destination, it is possible to change between
voice command and iDrive at any time. Reactivate the voice command function for this purpose if necessary.
Spelling town/city of destination
To enter the town/city of destination, spell it
using the customary spelling of the country of
destination.
Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal
volume, avoiding excessive emphasis and
pauses.
1. Spell town/city name:
Say at least the first three letters of the
town/city of destination. The more letters you say, the more exactly the system recognizes the town/city.
The system can suggest up to 20 towns/cities of destination that match your entries.
Up to 6 entries are displayed at once on the
Control Display.
With {Options} you can have the possible
commands read aloud.<
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation
Starting destination guidance with
manual destination entry
Communications Entertainment
3. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until the house number
is selected and press the controller.
Driving tips
Controls
2. Enter the house number:
Select the individual digits and press the
controller.
At a glance
button on the steering wheel.
Mobility
All house numbers stored for the street on the
navigation DVD can be entered.
1. Press the
Reference
Entering house number
Destination entry
A destination is suggested by the system.
A destination is suggested by the system.
2. Select a town/city:
3. Select a town/city:
> Select highlighted town/city: {Yes}
> Select highlighted town/city: {Yes}
> Select other town/city: {No}
> Select other town/city: {No}
> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> Display additional entries of the list:
{Next page}
> Reenter the town/city: {Repeat}
> To respell the town/city: {Repeat}
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the town/city of destination is selected and press the controller.
Entering the destination as an entire
word*
Towns/cities of destination and streets located
in the region where the language of the voice
command system is spoken can be entered as
an entire word.
> Enter town/city of destination by
spelling it: {Spell}
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the town/city of destination is selected and press the controller.
Destinations that sound the same which
cannot be differentiated by the system
are summarized in a separate list and shown as
a destination followed by three dots.
Select this entry with {Yes} if necessary. Then
select the desired city/town in this list.<
Example: to enter a US town/city of destination
as an entire word, the system language must be
English.
Entering street and house number
Speak smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding
excessive emphasis and pauses.
To enter the house number:
1. Wait for the system to request the town/city
of destination.
2. Say the name of the town/city of destination.
The system can suggest up to 6 towns/cities of destination that match your entries.
The street is entered in the same way as the
town/city of destination.
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
Up to 4-digit house numbers can be entered.
Say the house number as individual digits.
Starting destination guidance
{Start guidance}
Destination guidance starts immediately.
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
The destination is added to the destination list
or can be stored in the address book.
{Add to destination list} or
{Add to address book}
5. Press the controller to accept or store the
destination in the destination guidance system.
The selected town/city of destination and
other menu items are displayed.
6. Select the desired menu item:
> "Start route guidance" starts destination
guidance.
> "Show current position" places the current position in the center of the map.
3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.
> "Show destination position" places the
current destination in the center of the
map.
> "Return to map" changes back to the
"Input map".
>
Exit the menu.
A section of a map is displayed on the Control Display:
> During destination guidance, around the
current destination
7. Press the controller.
> With the destination guidance deactivated, around the last destination
entered
The map for destination input can also be called
up from the map view:
Select the
symbol and press the controller.
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
> Moving map: move the controller in the
corresponding direction.
The controller can be moved to the left,
right, forward and back.
Navigation
2. Press the controller.
> Changing scale: turn the controller.
Communications Entertainment
1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
"New destination" is selected.
4. Select a destination with the cursor.
Mobility
If you only know the location of the town/city or
street of the destination, then you can input the
destination by using a map. You can use the
cursor to select the destination on the map and
then adopt it into the destination guidance.
Reference
Map-guided destination
selection
Controls
Saving destination
Destination entry
Selecting destination using
information
You can obtain a display of selected destinations, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and adopt
them into the destination guidance.
7. Select "<Start search>" and press the controller.
These destinations are displayed on the
Control Display.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
2. Select "Information" and press the controller.
8. Select a destination and press the controller.
The scope of the information and
symbols is dependent on the respective navigation DVD.<
9. Select the desired menu item:
3. Select location:
> "On destination"
> "On location"
> "On a new destination"
> To transfer the address to the destination list and start destination guidance:
Select the
symbol and press the
controller.
> To establish a telephone connection:
Select the
symbol and press the controller.
> To display additional destinations:
Select the
symbol and press the
controller.
> To start a new search:
Select the
symbol and press the controller.
4. Press the controller.
5. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and restaurants", and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the
arrow and press the controller.
6. Enter search criteria if necessary, e.g. the
maximum distance from the current location.
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
To hide the symbols in the map view:
1. Select the symbol and press the controller.
At a glance
This symbol indicates the current destination during destination guide.
To display other destinations in the destination
list:
Turn the controller.
Adopting the destination into the
destination guidance system
1. Select the desired destination from the destination list and press the controller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.
2. Select "Hide map icons" and press the controller.
Controls
If, for example, you have selected the category
Hotels, the hotels are shown on the map as
symbols.
The last destination entered is the first item in
the destination list.
Driving tips
Symbols in map view
Destination list
The last 20 destinations entered into the destination list are displayed. You can select these
destinations and adopt them into the destination guidance system.
For example, in order to plan a longer route, you
can store all of the destinations you wish to visit
in the destination list ahead of time, refer to
Entering a destination manually on page 126.
Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
Editing destination list
1. Select the desired destination from the destination list and press the controller.
2. The selected destination can be edited:
> Saving entry:
Select "Add to address book".
> Displaying information on destination:
Select "Information on destination".
> Deleting entry:
Select "Delete entry".
> Deleting all entries:
Select "Delete list". Destination guidance is switched off.
> Changing entry:
Select "Edit". For operation, refer to
Entering destination via town/city name,
page 127.
3. Press the controller.
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
To exit from the menu:
Select the
arrow and press the controller.
Reference
To display the symbols:
Select "Show map icons" and press the controller.
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
The symbols are hidden.
Destination entry
Address book
Storing current position*
Opening address book
The current position can be adopted into the
address book.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "New address" is
selected and press the controller.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
Storing destinations in address book
You can store approx. 100 destinations in the
address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.
2. Select "New address" and press the controller.
3. Select "Use current location as address"
and press the controller.
The name given can be changed. For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 126.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
You can also enter your current position in the
address book if you have left the sector covered
by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must
enter a name.
Selecting destinations from address
book
3. Select "Enter address" and press the controller.
4. Enter name and address, also refer to
Entering a destination manually, page 126.
1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.
The stored entries are displayed on the
Control Display.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
The entry is stored in the address book.
You can also store a destination from the destination list in the address book, refer to
page 133.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Deleting individual destinations from
address book
1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.
At a glance
To start destination guidance:
Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.
Driving tips
3. Select "Delete address" and press the controller.
Changing destinations from address
book
1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.
3. Select "Edit address" and press the controller.
4. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Deleting all destinations from address
book
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Navigation
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
Controls
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
4. Change entry.
For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 126.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
6. Select "Delete address book" and press the
controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Delete data" is selected and
press the controller.
Reference
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the controller.
Communications Entertainment
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
Destination entry
Storing home address
You can store your current position or the current destination as a home address in the
address book. This entry is in the second position in the address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Home address" is
selected and press the controller.
Selecting route
You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like when
entering the destination and whenever the destination guidance is active.
The route is planned according to fixed rules,
taking the road type into account, e.g. whether
it involves freeways or winding roads. The road
types are stored on the navigation DVD. As a
result, the routes recommended by the navigation system may not always be the same ones
that you would choose based on personal experience.
Changing route criteria
1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
3. Select "Use current location as address", or
"Save current destination" during the destination guidance, and press the controller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Route preference"
is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
Adopting home address as destination
1. Select "Home address" and press the controller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.
Changing home address
1. Select "Home address" and press the controller.
2. Select "Edit address" and press the controller. For operation, refer to Entering a
destination manually, page 126.
The various criteria are listed on the Control
Display.
3. Select a route criterion for the route:
> "With highways"
Freeways and major traffic arteries are
given priority.
> "Avoid highways"
Freeways are avoided where possible.
> "Fast route"
The short traveling time, being a combination of the shortest possible route and
the fastest roads
> "Short route"
Short route, regardless of how fast or
slow progress will be
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
The route criterion is selected.
5. If necessary, select an additional route criterion and then press the controller:
> "Dynamic route"*
Automatic changing of the route in case
of traffic obstructions. Depending on
road type and the kind and extent of the
traffic obstruction, the route can also be
calculated in a way that passes through
the traffic obstruction.
> "Avoid tollroads"
Tollroads are avoided where possible.
> "Avoid ferries"
Ferries are avoided where possible.
To exit from the menu:
Select the
arrow and press the controller.
Example:
Instead of "Munich", you can also enter the
German spelling "München" or the Italian
spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns/
cities and streets, the system will complete
them automatically as soon as enough letters are available to ensure unambiguous
identification.
> The system only accepts name entries
beginning with letters that are stored on the
navigation DVD. The system will not accept
nonexistent names and addresses.
The route criteria can also be changed in the
arrow or map view:
1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and
press the controller.
2. Select a route criterion and press the controller.
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Reference
Mobility
If the route criteria "Avoid highways",
"Avoid tollroads" or "Avoid ferries" are
selected, the calculation time for the route can
increase considerably.<
Controls
> Names of specific towns/cities can also vary
from the official versions, provided that the
spelling of the entry corresponds to a standard form used in another country.
Driving tips
The system supports the word matching principle to make it easier for you to enter the names
of streets or towns/cities. The system runs
ongoing checks, comparing your destination
entries with the data stored on the navigation
DVD as the basis for instant response. The user
benefits include:
Navigation
Word matching principle
Communications Entertainment
4. Press the controller.
Destination guidance
Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Navigation" is selected and
press the controller.
2. Select a destination from the destination list
and press the controller or enter a new destination, refer to page 126.
With programmable memory/
direct selection buttons
Press the
...
button on which the
desired destination is stored. Also refer to
page 22.
Destination guidance,
terminating/continuing
In arrow display or map view
Select the
symbol and press the controller.
3. Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.
In destination list
This symbol marks the current destination.
1. Select the current destination and press the
controller.
After the route has been calculated, destination
guidance is indicated by arrows or a map display on the Control Display.
The destination guidance can also be started in
the arrow or map view:
Select the
symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, you can operate
other equipment via iDrive at any time. You are
notified well in advance of a necessary change
of direction by spoken instructions and the display of the direction arrows.
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Manually displaying traffic information*
3
Selecting route criteria
4
Starting/stopping destination guidance
The destination guidance starts automatically
after a short time.
5
Arrow to destination as the crow flies
6
Distance to the next change of direction
To start destination guidance immediately:
Select "Yes" and press the controller.
7
Current position
8
Direction of travel
Displaying route
You have the option of displaying various views
of the route during destination guidance.
From another menu, you can change
directly to the screen last displayed,
refer to Comfort opening of menu items,
page 18.<
Displaying arrow display
1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
> Solid arrow:
Arrow shows the route to be calculated
from a bird's eye view when the vehicle
is not located in an area contained on the
navigation DVD, e.g. in a parking structure.
Depending on the equipment, the estimated
time of arrival and the distance to the destination are displayed in the top or bottom line of the
Control Display.
Before a change of direction, the appearance of
the arrow changes.
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Arrow display" is
selected and press the controller.
> Hollow arrow:
Destination guidance on the calculated
route.
Navigation
Switching voice instructions on/off
2
Communications Entertainment
1
If the destination was not reached before the
end of the last trip, upon restarting you will
see the question:
"Continue guidance to destination?".
Driving tips
Controls
At a glance
The arrow display is displayed.
2. Select "Stop guidance" and press the controller.
Destination guidance
3. Press the controller.
1
Street name for change of direction
2
Distance to change of direction
1
Switching voice instructions on/off
3
Change of direction
2
Starting/stopping destination guidance
3
Selecting destination using map
4
Displaying the menu in which the information last selected can be displayed/hidden,
refer to Selecting destination via information on page 132
5
Changing map view
To exit from the menu:
Select the
arrow and press the controller.
Displaying map view
You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.
>
1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until the desired map
view is selected:
>
>
"Map facing north"
"Map direction of travel"
"Perspective"
6
Changing route criteria
7
Manually displaying traffic information*
> "Map facing north"
8
Arrow to destination as the crow flies
> "Map direction of travel"
The estimated time of arrival and the distance
to the destination are shown in the bottom line
of the Control Display.
> "Perspective"
To exit from the menu:
Select the
arrow and press the controller.
At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km, you
have the option of deciding whether to orient
the map to north or toward your current direction of travel. At scales of 250 miles/500 km or
greater, the map always points toward north.
Changing map view
Select the corresponding symbol and press the
controller.
The next map view is displayed.
Changing scale
Turn the controller to change the scale.
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
You can have the roads and towns along the
route displayed during destination guidance.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
The distances remaining to be traveled on each
individual road are also displayed.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
Driving tips
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Route list" is
selected and press the controller.
At a glance
To switch the voice instructions on/off at any
time:
Controls
Displaying streets and towns/cities of
route
Destination guidance via
voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
6. Select "Navigation voice instructions" and
press the controller.
Mobility
During destination guidance, voice instructions
can be switched on or off in the arrow or map
view:
Select the
symbol and press the controller.
Communications Entertainment
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Languages" is selected and
press the controller.
Navigation
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
is selected and press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use*.
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
The voice instructions are switched on.
Destination guidance
Repeating and canceling voice
instructions
1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
With the programmable button on the steering
wheel you can also make the following settings,
refer to page 53:
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "New route" is
selected and press the controller.
> Repeat the voice instruction:
Press the button.
> Switch voice instructions on/off:
Press button longer.
Setting volume of voice instructions
The volume can only be adjusted during a voice
instruction.
1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if required.
2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
3. Turn the controller to enter the desired
number and press the controller.
The route is recalculated.
To exit from the menu without changing the
route:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Traffic information*
This volume is independent of the volume of the
audio sources.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Bypassing route sections
During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.
In many congested areas, you can receive traffic information transmitted by radio stations.
The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic
management centers and the traffic information
is periodically updated.
During destination guidance, the traffic information relevant to your planned route is automatically displayed. Whether destination guidance is active or not, you can have the traffic
information displayed in the map view or in the
traffic info list.
Switching reception of traffic
information on/off
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
menu.
Manually displaying traffic information
During destination guidance
During destination guidance, traffic information
can be displayed in the arrow or map view.
At a glance
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
Select the
symbol and press the controller.
5. Select "Traffic Info" and press the controller.
First the traffic information along the planned
route is shown sorted according to the distance
to the current vehicle position.
The traffic information can be received and
displayed.
Communications Entertainment
During destination guidance, the traffic information on the planned route is marked with a
yellow diamond.
Navigation
Driving tips
4. Turn the controller until "Traffic Info settings" is selected and press the controller.
Controls
If the
symbol is shown with a red border, traffic information is available for the planned route.
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Depending on the station, either the station name, frequency, local number or
other information is displayed.<
Mobility
"AUTO": automatic selection of the Traffic Info
station with the strongest reception.
Destination guidance
With destination guidance switched off
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
3. Select "Traffic Info" and press the controller.
Symbols for traffic information
Traffic event with map scales greater
than 5 miles/10 km, arrow points in
the direction of travel concerned
Several traffic events have been
received. Select a smaller scale to
display these individually.
Traffic light failure
Roadwork
General traffic obstruction
Transport of hazardous load
Vehicle on wrong carriage way
Danger
First the traffic information along the planned
route is shown sorted according to the distance
to the current vehicle position.
Low clearance
No parking
Depiction of traffic information in map
view
Fog
The traffic information symbols are shown in
the map view up to a scale of 100 miles/200 km.
Heavy rain
The section of the route affected by a traffic
report as well as the number for the type of incident are displayed and hidden. This occurs as a
function of the scale selected.
Displaying detailed traffic information
Select a traffic information item from the list and
press the controller.
Slippery road
Cross winds
Smog
Road close
Slow traffic
Traffic back up
Stopped traffic
Icy roads
Uneven surface
To exit from the menu:
Select the
arrow and press the controller.
Accident
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Lane closure
Delay
Slow traffic or other event
Stop-and-go traffic
Stopped traffic
Traffic event in both directions of
travel
Traffic information during destination
guidance
System response will vary depending on
whether or not "Dynamic route" is selected.
Displaying traffic obstructions
Displaying current position
You can also display your current position with
the destination guidance switched off.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Current position"
is selected and press the controller.
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
If a traffic obstruction is reported to the navigation system and "Dynamic route" is not
selected, you will be provided with certain information from a distance of approx. 25 miles/
40 km, e.g. the length of the traffic congestion.
The last possible junction will be displayed
shortly before this.
Driving tips
When "Dynamic route" is selected, the route
will be changed automatically in the event of a
traffic obstruction. The system does not point
out traffic obstructions along the original route.
Depending on road type and the kind and extent
of the traffic obstruction, the calculated route
may lead through the traffic obstruction.
Navigation
Dynamic route planning
Communications Entertainment
This information is also displayed if you have
called up a different application on the Control
Display.
Controls
Police checkpoint
Destination guidance
The current position of your BMW is displayed.
If the navigation system is unable to identify a
town or city, your current map coordinates will
appear.
To exit from the menu:
Select the
arrow and press the controller.
You can also have the current position displayed on a map, refer to page 140.
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. Select a
destination that is as close as possible to
the original.
> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination without the street name?
On the navigation DVD, no downtown area
can be determined for the city or town
entered. Enter any street, or a destination
such as the railway station etc., then start
the destination guidance.
> you want to enter a destination for the destination guidance, but it is not possible to
select the letters for your desired entry?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this
case, the system will not offer you any letters to choose from. Select a destination
that is as close as possible to the original.
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
> the navigation system does not react to
entries?
If the battery was disconnected, it takes
about 10 minutes before the system is once
again operational.
Navigation
> you request the current position of your
vehicle, but do not receive a precise display?
The system is unable to receive enough
GPS signals at your current position due to
obstructions, your position is not yet available on your navigation DVD, or the system
is in the process of calculating your position. As a rule, reception is guaranteed in
the open air.
> the system stops furnishing directions on
which way to turn as you approach intersections?
You are driving in an area that has not yet
been completely recorded on the navigation DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a
turn, you will see an arrow which indicates
the general direction of your planned route.
Or you have left the recommended route
and the system requires a few seconds to
calculate a new recommended route.
Communications Entertainment
> a navigation DVD is inserted, but the
request to insert the DVD is displayed on
the Control Display?
The navigation DVD may not be the right
DVD for the navigation system. The DVD is
labeled accordingly.
Mobility
What to do if …
Reference
What to do if …
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Entertainment
This chapter describes the operation
of the radio and CD player as well as
their tone settings.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
On/off and tone
On/off and tone
The following audio sources have shared
controls and setting options:
1
Entertainment sound output on/off, volume
> Press: switch on/off.
When the system is switched on, the
most recently selected radio station or
CD track is played.
> Professional* radio or
Business radio
> CD player
> Turn: adjust volume.
> CD changer*
2
3
Controls
4
Drive for audio CDs
Eject CD
Station scan/track search
The audio sources can be operated using:
> Change radio station.
> Buttons in the area of the CD player
> Select track for CD player and
CD changer.
> iDrive
> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11
5
> Programmable memory/direct selection
buttons, refer to page 21
Operating via iDrive
Drive for navigation DVDs
Buttons near CD player
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
The layout of the buttons can vary depending
on your vehicle's equipment.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
One drive:
You have the following choices:
> "FM" and "AM": radio reception
Two drives:
> "WB": Weather Band station
> "SAT": satellite radio
> "CD": CD player or CD changer
> "AUX": AUX-In connection
> USB/audio interface*
> "Set": depending on the audio source,
other adjustments can be made, e.g. with
the radio: update station with strongest
reception, store station, tone control,
sample stations.
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
At a glance
From another menu, you can change
directly to the screen last displayed,
refer to Comfort opening of menu items,
page 18.<
Controls
With the ignition key in radio-ready position or
higher, the selected audio source is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
Switching on/off
Adjusting volume
Treble and bass
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Treble / Bass" is selected
and press the controller.
Turn knob 1 next to the CD player until the
desired volume is set.
You can also adjust the volume with the buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
From radio readiness, the setting for the remote
control used at the moment is saved.
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass, or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The sound settings are globally adjusted for all
audio sources.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Treble" or "Bass".
Driving tips
For a single drive, the sound output is available
for approx. 20 minutes with the ignition
switched off.
To do so, switch the sound output on again.
The tone settings can also be selected when
you have opened "Entertainment" in the start
menu:
Select "Set" and then "Tone", and press the
controller.
Navigation
This symbol on the Control Display indicates that sound output is switched off.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
Communications Entertainment
To switch the Entertainment sound output
on/off:
Press knob 1 next to the CD player.
Changing tone settings
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
From radio readiness, the settings are saved for
the remote control used at the moment.
On/off and tone
Balance and fader
Individual high-end sound system*
You can adjust the volume distribution in the
same manner as "Treble / Bass".
You can choose between Stereo and Surround.
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Speed-dependent volume control
The speed-dependent volume control automatically increases the volume with increasing
speed. You can set various stages for the
increase in volume.
1. Select "Speed volume" and press the controller.
2. Select "Stereo" or "Surround".
2. Turn the controller:
The adjustment is applied; the field can be
changed.
3. Press the controller.
The spatial sound effect is activated.
Professional LOGIC7 HiFi System*
You can select a spatial sound effect that
improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency
ranges.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
settings.
1. Open the start menu.
At a glance
2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater".
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
Driving tips
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered
trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the
Harman International Group.
Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges:
1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.
With two drives: select "Yes".
Mobility
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select the desired frequency range.
Navigation
To switch off spatial sound:
Select "Off" and press the controller.
Communications Entertainment
3. Press the controller.
LOGIC7 spatial sound is switched on.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Reset" is selected and
press the controller.
Controls
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Radio
Radio
Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM
wavebands.
Changing stations
Listening to radio
Turn the controller.
In addition to the stations currently displayed,
you can have stations with another selection
criterion displayed.
Press the button if the sound output is switched
off.
Professional* radio
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
> "All stations":
Stations that can currently be received in
the "FM" waveband.
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "FM" or "AM" is selected.
> "Autostore":
The stations with the strongest received
signals in the "AM" waveband.
> "Presets":
Stations you have stored, refer to page 156.
> "Manual":
To set stations that can be received in addition to those displayed, refer to Selecting
frequency manually on page 155.
4. Press the controller.
Stations are shown on the Control Display on
the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "Presets".
If "Autostore" does not display any stations or
if the stations displayed can no longer be
received, to update the station with the strongest signal, refer to page 156.
Business radio
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:
> "Autostore":
The stations with the strongest signal, refer
to page 156.
> "Presets":
Stations you have stored, refer to page 156.
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Driving tips
> "All stations":
Stations that can currently be received in
the "FM" waveband.
> "Autostore":
The stations with the strongest received
signals in the "AM" waveband.
> "Presets":
Stations you have previously stored, refer to
page 156.
> "Manual":
To set stations that can be received in addition to those displayed, refer to Selecting
frequency manually.
1. Change into the second field from the top.
2. Turn the controller until the desired selection criterion is selected and press the controller.
At a glance
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
Controls
In addition to the stations currently displayed,
you can have stations with another selection
criterion displayed.
The system automatically plays a brief sample
from each of the stations on the current waveband.
The stations are sampled.
To end sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
This cancels sampling of the stations, and the
radio remains on the current station.
Buttons next to CD player
To sample the stations, press and hold the
button for the corresponding direction.
To stop scanning, press the button again.
Selecting frequency manually
With "Manual" you can select stations that are
received in addition to those displayed.
Navigation
Changing selection criteria
Sampling stations, scan
Communications Entertainment
> "Manual":
To set stations that can be received in addition to those displayed, refer to Selecting
frequency manually.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
Press the
button for the corresponding
direction.
The system changes to the next displayed station.
You can also change stations with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Buttons next to CD player
Mobility
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
Radio
The display of the stations with the best reception is updated. The frequencies of the stations
are displayed.
Storing stations
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller to set a certain frequency.
Updating stations with best reception
Radio Professional on "AM" and Radio Business:
If you are on a longer journey and leave the
transmission range of the stations originally set,
you can update the list of stations with the best
reception signal.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until the desired selection criterion is selected and press the controller.
3. Select the desired frequency or station.
"Set" is selected.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Store" and press the controller.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
6. Turn the controller until the desired memory position is selected.
7. Press the controller.
The station is stored.
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
1. Select "FM" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
You can also store a station on the programmable memory/direct selection buttons, also refer
to page 21.
3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.
1. Select a station.
2.
...
Press and hold desired but-
ton.
Changing a memory position
1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired station.
"Set" is selected.
3. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
RDS is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
4. Select "Store" and press the controller.
Automatically sorting
stations*
For the "All stations" selection criterion, you
can set whether the most frequently used stations are displayed at the beginning.
1. Select "All stations" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
5. Turn the controller until the desired memory position is selected.
The number of the memory position
appears beside the name or frequency of
the station.
2. Select "Favorites" and press the controller.
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
With programmable memory/
direct selection buttons
Driving tips
Switching RDS on/off*
Mobility
From radio readiness, the stations are saved for
the remote control used at the moment.
Reference
The stations of the last selection criterion are
displayed once again after a short time.
In the FM frequency range, additional information is transmitted via RDS. If the reception conditions are good, the station names are shown
on the Control Display. If the reception is weak
or disrupted, it can take some time before the
station names are displayed.
At a glance
RDS Radio Data System
Controls
6. Press the controller.
The station is stored.
Radio
High Definition Radio*
Many stations transmit both analog and digital
signals. You can receive these stations digitally
and with improved sound quality.
A digital radio network must be available in
order to receive digital stations.
The most frequently used stations are
shown at the beginning.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Weather news flashes*
Weather Radio is a service of the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA)
of the US Department of Trade. Weather news
flashes are repeated every 4 to 6 minutes and
are routinely updated at intervals of 1 to 3 hours,
and more often when necessary. Most stations
operate 24 hours a day. In case of a storm, the
National Weather Service interrupts the routine
weather news and transmits special warning
messages instead. If you have a question about
NOAA Weather Radio, please contact the nearest office of the National Weather Service.
Details are also provided on the Internet at
www.nws.noaa.gov.
Calling up weather news flashes
1. Select "WB" and press the controller.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field. Turn the controller
until "HD radio" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Off" and press the controller.
The reception of digital stations is activated.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
being received digitally.
2. Select a station.
The station for weather news flashes may be
unavailable in some regions.
With some stations the digital signals are not
transmitted simultaneously with the analog signals. If you are in an area in which the selected
station is not continuously received digitally,
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
2. Change into the second field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
At a glance
playback switches between analog and digital
reception. This can result in repetitions or interruptions. In this case it may be advisable to
deactivate digital radio reception.
Selecting programs of a digital station*
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
" and press the con-
2. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
3. Select a station that is received digitally.
This symbol is displayed when a station
is being received digitally.
Switch to the next program of the digital station with the buttons on the radio or
the steering wheel.
You can store a station, refer to page 156.
Updating stations offering digital
reception
If you are on a longer journey and leave the
transmission range of the stations originally set,
you can update the list of stations with the best
reception signal.
Displaying additional information
With the digital stations, additional information
on the current track is displayed, e.g. the name
of the artist.
1. Select a station and press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
Mobility
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
The display of the stations offering digital
reception is updated. This can take up to
2 minutes.
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
4.
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
5. Select "Autostore
troller.
Driving tips
Controls
Some stations transmit several programs.
To select one of these programs:
Radio
The information is displayed.
If a digital station is received again when the
station is changed, the additional information
will be displayed again following a brief interruption.
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
The channels are offered to you in predefined
packages. To receive the channels of your
choice, you must have this package enabled.
With this new technology the signal may
fail, causing interruptions in reception.<
1. Select a channel that has not yet been
enabled and press the controller.
A telephone number and the electronic
serial number, ESN, are displayed.
The electronic serial number is
required for enabling or disabling.<
At a glance
Enabling
2. To enable the channels:
Dial phone number.
Enabling or disabling
channels
Disabling
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
1. Select an enabled channel and press the
controller.
Driving tips
You can receive up to 100 different channels
with high sound quality.
Controls
Satellite radio*
4. Press the controller.
The electronic serial number is
required to disable.<
3. To have the channels disabled:
Dial phone number.
The channels are displayed.
These channels are enabled.
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
2. Select "ESN" and press the controller.
The electronic serial number, ESN, is displayed.
Reference
3. Select "SAT".
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
Satellite radio
Selecting and storing channel
1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.
Channels or categories appear in the Control Display.
2. Select a menu item:
> "Presets":
Up to twelve channels you have stored
previously.
The channels of this category are displayed.
5.
Select a channel marked with this symbol.
6. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
7. Select "Play" and press the controller.
> "All channels":
All channels are displayed.
> "Categories":
All channels sorted by category, e.g.
news, jazz.
Additional information
The name of the channel and additional information on the current track are displayed, e.g.
the name of the artist.
3. Press the controller.
4. If "Categories" has been selected:
Select the desired category and press the
controller.
1
Artist
2
Track
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
3. Select "Store" and press the controller.
Reception may not be possible for certain
reasons, e.g. environmental influences or
topographical conditions. The satellite radio
has no influence on this.
The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages, next to tall buildings,
near trees, mountains or other sources of radio
interference.
Reception is usually possible again as soon as
the signal is available again.<
"Presets" is displayed.
The channel is stored. The stations of the last
selection criterion are displayed again after a
short time.
Changing channel with buttons next to
CD player
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
Press the
button for the corresponding
direction.
The system changes to the next enabled channel.
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
4. Turn the controller to select a memory position and press the controller.
At a glance
If no signal can be received for more than
4 seconds, a message is displayed on the Control Display.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
Controls
Notes
1. Select the desired channel.
Driving tips
Storing channel
CD player and CD changer
CD player and CD changer*
Listening to CDs
Compressed audio files*
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "CD" is selected and press
the controller.
CDs with compressed audio files, i.e. MP3,
can be played by the CD player, but not by the
CD changer.
CD player: starting CD
4. With a CD changer, change to the second
field from the top and turn the controller
until "CD" is selected and press the controller.
The CD player is started.
With two drives:
The upper drive is for audio CDs.
Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side
up. The CD is automatically pulled in.
Playback starts automatically if the sound output is on. For CDs with compressed audio files,
it can take up to approx. 1 minute to read in the
data depending on the directory structure.
To start playback when there is already a CD in
the drive:
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
Playback starts automatically if the sound output is switched on.
With programmable memory/
direct selection buttons
You can store the function CD player on the
programmable memory/direct selection buttons to start the CD player, refer to page 21.
Press the button next to CD player.
The CD emerges slightly from the drive.
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Buttons next to CD player
4. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. Turn the controller until the
desired CD, CD 1 - 6, is selected and press
the controller.
You can also change the track with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Via iDrive
Select a track by turning the controller.
Compressed audio files*
At the end of the last track, the next CD will be
selected.
1. Select the directory if necessary and press
the controller.
If the CD magazine has been newly filled, playback begins with the lowest CD, e.g. CD 1,
track 1.
The CD magazine's load status is indicated on
the Control Display.
With programmable memory/
direct selection buttons
2. Select the track and press the controller.
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
You can store a CD compartment of the CD
changer on the programmable memory/direct
selection buttons to start the CD changer, refer
to page 21.
Driving tips
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "CD" is selected and press
the controller.
Navigation
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
Press the
button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.
The CD will start to play at the start of the track.
The track is displayed on the Control Display.
Communications Entertainment
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
At a glance
Selecting a track
Fill the CD magazine and insert, refer to
page 168.
Controls
CD changer: starting CD
CD player and CD changer
To change the directory:
Select the directory and press the controller.
Sampling tracks, scan
The system automatically plays a brief sample
from each of the tracks on the current CD.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
To exit from the menu:
Select the
arrow and press the controller.
You can store a certain track on the programmable memory/direct selection buttons, refer to
page 21.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Displaying information on track*
With compressed audio files, you can display
possibly included information about the current
track, e.g. the name of the artist.
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
To end sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
This cancels sampling of the tracks, and the
player remains on the current track.
Compressed audio files*
The information about the current track is displayed.
1. Select the current track and press the controller.
From radio readiness, the setting for the remote
control used at the moment is saved.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To sample all tracks of the current directory, select "Scan directory" and press
the controller.
> To sample all tracks of the CD, select
"Scan all" and press the controller.
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
1. Select the current track and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
At a glance
Compressed audio files*
To end scan search:
> To repeat all tracks of the current directory, select "Repeat directory" and press
the controller.
Controls
> To repeat the selected track, select
"Repeat track" and press the controller.
1. Press the controller.
Driving tips
2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and
press the controller.
This cancels the scan search and the player
remains on the current track.
To cancel repeat mode:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory"
and press the controller.
Random play sequence
In this mode, the tracks on the current CD are
played once in a random sequence.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
To cancel random mode:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Communications Entertainment
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
Navigation
Repeating track
2. Select the desired menu item:
The current track on the CD is repeated.
To cancel repeat mode:
1. Press the controller again.
> To play all tracks of the current directory
in random order, select "Random directory" and press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
1. Select the current track and press the controller.
Mobility
Compressed audio files*
CD player and CD changer
> To play all tracks of the CD in random
order, select "Random all" and press the
controller.
To cancel random mode:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all"
and press the controller.
Inserting/removing CDs into/from
CD magazine
When inserting or removing CDs, remember to
hold them only by their edges, taking care to
avoid touching the reflective CD memory surface.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons next to CD player:
Press and hold the
sponding direction.
button for the corre-
CD magazine
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in
the glove compartment.
To insert:
Insert one CD into each compartment of the
magazine with the labeled side up.
Removing CD magazine
To insert CDs into the CD magazine 1 or
remove them from it, you must first remove the
magazine from the CD changer:
To remove:
Pull out the desired tray and remove the CD.
Inserting CD magazine
Press button 2 to eject the CD magazine 1.
Wait at least 2 seconds before pushing in the
magazine again so that the inserted CDs can be
read in again.
Push in the CD magazine as far as possible in
the direction of the arrow.
The CD changer automatically reads in the
inserted CDs and is then ready for operation.
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Care
If necessary, clean the reflective scanning side
of the CDs/DVDs with a commercially available
cleaning cloth by wiping in straight lines from
the center outward.
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes.
Home-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with selfrecorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent
data-creation or recording processes, or poor
quality or advanced age of the CD/DVD blank.
Label CDs/DVDs only on the top, using a marker
designed for this purpose.
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
Manufacturers often provide CDs/DVDs with
copy protection. This can mean that some CDs/
DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to
a limited extent.
Driving tips
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
Navigation
General malfunctions
Avoid fingerprints dust, scratches, and moisture.
Keep CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over
122 7/506, high levels of humidity or direct
sunlight.
Communications Entertainment
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,
otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs with adhesive
labels as these can come loose during playback
due to heat build-up and cause irreparable
damage to the system.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, otherwise the CDs or the adapter can jam and may no
longer be ejected.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus;
otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<
Mobility
Damaged CDs/DVDs
Reference
Notes
AUX-In connection
AUX-In connection
You can connect an external audio device, e.g.
an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehicle loudspeakers. The sound can be adjusted
via iDrive.
Starting audio playback
Connecting
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
The audio device must be switched on.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "AUX" is selected and press
the controller.
For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeakers, connect the headphones or the line-out
connection of the device to the socket 1 with a
1/8 in/3,5 mm jack plug.
4. Select "AUX" and press the controller.
5. Adjust volume and sound if necessary.
With programmable memory/
direct selection buttons
You can save the function audio AUX on the
programmable memory/direct selection buttons to start audio playback, refer to page 21.
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Ask your BMW center which audio devices are
suitable.
During the transfer you can select the tracks via
the directories and file names.
Connecting
Following the transfer you can call up the tracks
via the information and playback lists.
The information of up to four USB devices can
be stored in the vehicle, for a total of approx.
20,000 tracks.
If a fifth USB device is connected, the information of the tracks of the first USB device stored
in the vehicle is deleted.
1
USB interface
2
Connection for audio playback:
1/8 in/3,5 mm jack plug
Music tracks with integrated Digital
Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.<
iPod
To connect the iPod, use the BMW cable
adapter for Apple iPods. For more information,
please contact a BMW center or consult our
website: www.bmw.com
For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeakers, connect the iPod to the connections 1
and 2.
The menu structure of the iPod is supported by
the USB/audio interface.
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
After connecting for the first time, the information of all tracks (e.g. artist, music genre) and
the playback lists of the USB device are transferred to the vehicle. This process can take
some time. The time required is dependent on
the USB device and on the number of tracks.
Controls
Due to the large number of audio devices available on the market, operation via the vehicle
cannot be ensured for every audio device.
Driving tips
For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeakers, connect the USB device to the connection 1.
Navigation
The system can play back common audio files,
e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM) and ACC, as well
as playback lists in the M3U format.
Communications Entertainment
Use a flexible adapter cable for connection to protect the USB interface and your
USB device against mechanical damage.<
Mobility
USB storage medium
You can connect audio devices to the USB/
audio interface, e.g. an iPod or a USB device
(MP3 player, USB memory stick). You can then
operate these via iDrive.
Reference
USB/audio interface*
USB/audio interface
Starting audio playback
Via iDrive
If the audio device has a device name, this will
be displayed if possible.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
Selecting a track
You can call up the tracks via the playback lists
and information. With USB devices you can also
call up the tracks via the file directory.
1. Make your selection, e.g. "Playlists" or
"Artists", and press the controller.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "AUX" is selected and press
the controller.
2. Select the track and press the controller.
Displaying information on track
You can display any information stored on the
current track, e.g. the name of the artist.
4. Select "USB" or the name of the audio
device and press the controller.
5. The playback starts with the first track.
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information about the current track is displayed.
With programmable memory/
direct selection buttons
You can save the function "USB" on the programmable memory/direct selection buttons to
start audio playback, refer to page 21.
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s,
proper playback cannot always be ensured.
Connecting instructions
To cancel repeat mode:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the controller.
> The USB/audio interface supplies the connected audio device with power, provided
the audio device supports this function. It is
therefore unnecessary to connect the audio
device to a socket in the vehicle during
operation.
> Do not force the plug into the USB interface.
Random play sequence
You can play back the tracks of the selected list
in random order, e.g. all tracks of an artist.
1. Select the current track and press the controller.
> Do not connect any devices, e.g. fans or
lamps, to the USB/audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
> Do not use the audio interface to recharge
external devices.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
End random playback:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons next to CD player:
Mobility
button for the corre-
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Press and hold the
sponding direction.
At a glance
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the controller.
Controls
Do not subject the audio device to
extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
extremely high temperatures, refer to the operating instructions of the audio device. Otherwise, the audio device can be damaged and the
resulting distraction can reduce road safety
while driving.<
Driving tips
1. Select the current track and press the controller.
Navigation
Notes
Communications Entertainment
Repeating track
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter summarizes how to operate your
mobile phone using iDrive or voice control and
how to use BMW Assist or TeleService.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
Telephoning*
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone
preparation package. After a suitable mobile
phone has been paired in the vehicle once, you
can operate the mobile phone via iDrive, with
the buttons on the steering wheel and by voice.
A mobile phone that has been paired once is
automatically detected again as soon as it is
brought back inside the vehicle, provided that
the engine is running or the ignition is switched
on. The pairing data of up to four mobile phones
can be stored simultaneously. If several mobile
phones are detected simultaneously, the most
recently paired mobile phone can be operated
via the vehicle.
can endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users.<
Suitable mobile phones
Ask your BMW center which mobile phones
with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the
mobile phone preparation package or which
mobile phones will fit in the snap-in adapters
they offer. These mobile phones support the
functions described in this Owner's Manual,
provided they are running a certain software
version. Malfunctions can occur with other
mobile phones.
Care instructions
Using a phone in your vehicle
Using snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone
cradle, enables the battery to be charged and
the mobile phone to be connected to the external antenna of your vehicle. This ensures
improved network reception and a consistent
voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW center which mobile phones snap-in adapters are
offered for.
You can find what you need to know about caring for your mobile phone in the separate Caring
for your vehicle brochure and in the mobile
phone operating instructions.
Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone* using:
> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11
> iDrive, refer to page 16
> Voice commands, refer to page 187
For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emergency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate operating instructions for a
detailed description of safety precautions and
information, we request that you direct your
particular attention to the following:
Only make entries when traffic conditions
allow you to do so. Do not hold the mobile
phone in your hand while you are driving; use
the hands-free system instead. If you do not
observe this precaution, your being distracted
> Programmable memory/direct selection
buttons, refer to page 21
Avoid operating a mobile phone detected by
the vehicle with the keypad of the mobile
phone, otherwise malfunctions can occur.
Placing phone calls with BMW Assist
system*: BMW Assist calls
You can use the BMW Assist system via the
hands-free unit for BMW Assist calls.
When the status information "BMW Assist" or
"BMW Service" is displayed in "Communication", only BMW Assist calls are possible.
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
1. Insert the remote control as far as possible
into the ignition lock.
2. Switch on the ignition by pressing the Start/
Stop button without depressing the brake
or clutch pedal.
Preparation via iDrive
Initial operation
Pairing mobile phone in vehicle
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
3. Press the
menu.
button to open the start
Driving tips
The following prerequisites must be met:
At a glance
Switching on ignition
Controls
It may not be possible to establish a telephone
connection using the mobile phone while a connection is being established to BMW Assist
or while a call to BMW Assist is already in
progress. If this happens, you must unpair the
mobile phone and the vehicle if you wish to
place a call with the mobile phone.
> Suitable mobile phone: the mobile phone is
supported by the full mobile phone preparation package. Information on this subject is
also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com
5. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
> Bluetooth activated
> Connection not with confirmation
> Reconnect
> Depending on the mobile phone model, the
setting energy saving mode can, for example, result in vehicle failing to detect the
paired mobile phone.
> Specify any desired number as the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1, for pairing. This Bluetooth passkey is no longer required following successful pairing.
6. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
> The ignition is switched on.
Only pair the mobile phone with the vehicle stopped, otherwise the passengers
and other road users can be endangered due to
a lack of attentiveness on the part of the
driver.<
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
4. Press the controller to open the menu.
Mobility
> Depending on the mobile phone, presets in
the mobile phone are required: e.g. via the
following menu items:
Reference
> The Bluetooth links of the vehicle, refer to
page 181, and the mobile phone are active.
Navigation
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
Telephoning
7. Change into the second field from the top,
select "Phone" and press the controller.
Preparation with mobile phone
10. Additional operations must be carried out
on the mobile phone and differ depending
on the model, refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone, e.g. find, connect or pair under Bluetooth device. The
Bluetooth name of the vehicle is also shown
on the mobile phone display.
11. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
8. Select "Pair new phone" and press the controller.
Pairing
Depending on your mobile phone, you will first
be requested consecutively via the display of
your mobile phone or iDrive to enter the Bluetooth passkey you specified.
12. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, approx.
30 seconds are available for entering the
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and on the Control Display.
9. Select "Start pairing" and press the controller.
13. Change into the third field from the top,
select "Confirm passkey" and press the
controller.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is displayed.
14. Wait a few seconds until the "Communication" menu appears.
The next time you use the mobile phone in the
vehicle interior, it will be detected within a maximum of 2 minutes with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
With some mobile phone models it may
be necessary to make certain settings for
a permanent Bluetooth link, e.g. via the menu
item Authorization or Secure connection. Refer
to the operating instructions of your mobile
phone.<
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
1. Select "Restart pairing" and press the controller.
Controls
If not all phone book entries are displayed:
> Transfer all phone book entries from the
SIM card to the mobile phone if necessary.
> It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired consecutively. When you pair a fifth mobile phone, the
pairing data of the mobile phone for which the
pairing data were stored first in the vehicle will
be deleted.
At a glance
To repeat pairing:
2. Repeat steps 9 to 14.
If pairing was repeatedly unsuccessful, contact
BMW Customer Relations.
To call BMW Customer Relations:
Driving tips
As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the
SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmitted to your vehicle. This transmission is dependent on your mobile phone, refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone if
necessary, and can take several minutes.
Select "Help" and press the controller.
> Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone preparation package? Information on this subject is also provided on
the Internet at: www.bmw.com.
> Do the Bluetooth passkey on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? The same
Bluetooth passkey must be entered both on
the mobile phone display and via iDrive.
> Have you required longer than 30 seconds
to enter the Bluetooth passkey?
> Only a limited number of devices can be
connected to the mobile phone. Delete the
connection to other devices if necessary.
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
> The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch
the mobile phone off and then on again or
disconnect the power supply.
The phone number of BMW Customer Relations and information required for pairing is
shown on the display. With mobile phones
already paired, you can select the phone number of BMW Customer Relations to establish
the connection.
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Check if pairing is unsuccessful
Telephoning
List of paired mobile phones
The mobile phones for which the vehicle has
stored the pairing data can be displayed. If several paired mobile phones are detected by the
vehicle simultaneously, you can operate the
mobile phone highest up in the list via the vehicle.
7. Select "Move device up" and press the controller.
You can change the order of the mobile phones
in the list. As long as a mobile phone is selected
in this list, the mobile phones cannot be operated via the vehicle.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
menu.
button to open the start
The selected mobile phone is moved
upward by one position.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Unpairing mobile phone from vehicle
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
If you no longer want to operate a mobile phone
via the vehicle, you can delete the pairing data
of the mobile phone.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Change into the second field from the top,
select "Phone" and press the controller.
6. Select the desired mobile phone.
With two drives:
> Move the controller to the rear to change
into the bottom field.
> Select the desired mobile phone and
press the controller.
With a single drive:
> Select the desired mobile phone and
press the controller.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Switch off the mobile phone.
2. Press the
menu.
button to open the start
3. Press the controller to open the menu.
4. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
"Bluetooth" is selected.
6. Change into the second field from the top,
select "Phone" and press the controller.
7. Select the desired mobile phone.
With two drives:
> Move the controller to the rear to change
into the bottom field.
> Select the desired mobile phone and
press the controller.
With a single drive:
> Select the desired mobile phone and
press the controller.
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
6. Change into the second field from the top,
select "Settings" and press the controller.
7. Select "Bluetooth communication active"
and press the controller to activate or deactivate the link.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth technology is not approved in
all countries. Observe the applicable local
regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and the mobile
phone if necessary.
If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot
operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and
the mobile phone can use other devices with a
Bluetooth interface, e.g. a laptop computer.<
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between your vehicle and your mobile phone:
The Bluetooth link is activated.
The Bluetooth link is deactivated.
Communications Entertainment
The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from
the list.
The phone book entries and the lists of
stored phone numbers are also deleted.
Navigation
Driving tips
8. Select "Delete device" and press the controller.
Controls
5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
2. Press the
menu.
button to open the start
3. Press the controller to open the menu.
Mobility
1. Remove the mobile phone from the cradle
and switch it off.
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
4. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
Telephoning
Adjusting volume
speech quality during a call, we recommend
that you:
> Reduce background noises, e.g. by closing
the windows, reducing the air volume of the
automatic climate control or pointing the
opened front vent outlets downward.
> Reduce the volume of the hands-free system.
Requirements
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired
volume.
This volume for the hands-free system is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to
minimum volume.
> The pairing data of the mobile phone are
stored in the vehicle and the mobile phone
is ready to operate.
> The engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
You can also adjust the volume with the buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
> The mobile phone is detected by the vehicle.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Opening Communication
Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions via
iDrive:
You operate many of the functions described in
the following via the "Communication" menu.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
menu.
button to open the start
> Accepting/rejecting a call
> Dialing phone numbers
> Dialing phone numbers from the phone
book
> Dialing stored phone numbers, e.g. from the
list of accepted calls
> Ending a call
When the ignition and radio readiness are
switched off, e.g. after removing the remote
control from the ignition lock, you can continue
an ongoing call via the hands-free system for no
more than 25 minutes.
Speech quality
If the person you are talking to cannot understand you well, this may be due to excessively
loud background noises. The full mobile phone
preparation package can compensate for these
noises to a certain degree. To optimize the
2. Move the controller forward to open "Communication".
Receiving calls
If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone number has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.
Accepting a call
Press the
button on the steering wheel.
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Dialing phone numbers
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
With programmable memory/
direct selection buttons
You can store phone numbers on and call them
up with the programmable memory/direct
selection buttons, refer to page 21.
Ending a call
Press the
button on the steering wheel.
Alternative:
1. Select the phone number and press the
controller.
2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.
3. Enter the desired phone number by dialing
the individual digits and pressing the controller.
Always enter the complete phone number
consisting of national dialing code, area
code, and phone number.
The letters correspond to the digits on the
keypad of the mobile phone.
To delete the last digit:
Move the controller toward the right to
select the
arrow and press the controller.
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation
Calling
For your phone number to be displayed to the
person you are calling, the display of phone
numbers must be enabled by your service provider.
Communications Entertainment
Select "Reject" and press the controller.
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has
been activated.
Mobility
Rejecting a call
Reference
Alternative:
Press the
button on the steering wheel.
Driving tips
Controls
"Accept" is selected.
Press the controller.
4. Select "Dial number" and press the controller.
At a glance
Alternative:
Telephoning
2. "End call" is selected:
Press the controller.
Dialing phone numbers from phone
book
The list "A - Z" is available for you phone book
entries. The phone book entries appear on the
Control Display.
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
Dialing a phone number from phone
book or a phone number stored in a list
Phone numbers you have called, incoming calls
and the entries of the phone book are stored in
lists when the mobile phone is connected to the
vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is entered in
the phone book, the name of the entry is displayed instead of the phone number.
You can select the desired subscriber from the
list and establish the connection.
Five lists are available:
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. To limit the number of displayed entries,
select the first letter of the desired entry and
press the controller.
4. Select the desired entry and press the controller.
> "A - Z"
The entries of the mobile-phone phone
book, consisting of the name and phone
number, are sorted alphabetically.
> "Top 8"
The eight numbers called most frequently
from the phone book "A - Z" are automatically stored in the Top 8 list.
> "Redial"
The last eight phone numbers you have
dialed are automatically stored. The last
number dialed is at the top of the list.
> "Missed calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight calls
which were not accepted are stored. This
requires the telephone number of the caller
to have been sent.
> "Received calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight
accepted calls are stored. This requires the
telephone number of the caller to have been
sent.
5. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
If different phone numbers are stored in the
mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and
home, the name is shown once for each phone
number.
You can change a phone number stored in the
phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. Select the desired entry and press the controller.
4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Deleting individual entries
6. Select "Dial number" and press the controller.
1. Select the desired entry from the list and
press the controller.
Dialing a phone number stored in a list
2. Select "Delete" and press the controller.
At a glance
5. Change the phone number.
To select an entry and establish a connection:
Controls
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select list and press the controller:
> "Top 8"
> "Redial"
> "Received calls"
The entry is deleted.
Deleting entire list
Driving tips
> "Missed calls"
3. Select the desired entry and press the controller.
3. If applicable, select "Yes" and press the
controller.
The list is deleted.
4. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
BMW Contact*
If you have not enabled BMW Assist, you can
have several service numbers displayed:
Communications Entertainment
2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the
controller.
Navigation
1. Select an entry from the list and press the
controller.
> BMW Customer Relations* for information
on all aspects of your vehicle
If BMW Assist is enabled, refer to page 191.
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
> BMW center, e.g. when you want to make
an appointment for service
Mobility
> Roadside Assistance* of the BMW Group
when you require breakdown assistance
Telephoning
You can dial the displayed service phone numbers if your mobile phone is paired in the vehicle:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
Transferring phone number via tone
dialing method
The tone dialing method is required for access
to network services or for controlling devices,
e.g. remote checking of an answering machine.
This function is available when a connection
has been established.
1. Establish connection.
3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press
the controller.
2. With a single drive:
Press the controller.
Select "Keypad" and press the controller.
With two drives:
Move the controller backwards until the
bottom field is selected.
3. Select the desired character and press the
controller.
Each character is sent immediately and
confirmed by a tone depending on the
mobile phone model.
5. Select one of the following menu items and
press the controller:
> "Roadside Assistance"
> "Customer Relations"
> "Service Request"
6. Select "Call" and press the controller.
Contact is established.
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
From mobile phone to hands-free
system*
You can operate your mobile phone without
having to remove your hands from the steering
wheel. When making your entries, you will be
supported by announcements or questions in
many cases.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
When you telephone via the hands-free system,
you can also continue the call via the mobile
phone if necessary, depending on the mobile
phone model. Act according to what is shown
on the mobile phone display, refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone.
As an alternative, you can deactivate the Bluetooth link.
Depending on your mobile phone model, poor
reception of the wireless communications network can result in the system switching from
the hands-free system to the mobile phone.
Driving tips
1. Briefly press the
button on the steering
wheel.
An acoustic signal indicates that you can
say commands.
2. Say the command.
Ending/canceling operation by voice
Press the
or
button on the steering wheel
{Cancel}.
In dialogs where text is spoken, not a command,
e.g. a name, canceling is only possible using the
button on the steering wheel.
Having possible commands read aloud
The system understands default commands
that must be spoken word for word.
You can have the possible commands spoken
by the system at any point:
{Help}.
Using alternative commands
Navigation
> Press the
button above the storage
compartment. Switching over may take
several seconds.
Activating system
Communications Entertainment
> Depending on the mobile phone model
used, the conversation can be continued via
the hands-free system if necessary. Follow
the instructions displayed on the mobile
phone display, refer to the operating
instructions of your mobile phone.
Voice commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
{Dial name} or {Name}.
The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
For mobile phones that do not automatically
switch over to the hands-free mode:
The same prerequisites as for operation via
iDrive apply, refer to page 182.
Reference
You can continue calls begun outside the Bluetooth range of the vehicle via the hands-free
system when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. Depending on your mobile
phone, the system automatically switches over
to the hands-free mode.
The concept
At a glance
Operation by voice*
Controls
Changing between mobile
phone and hands-free system
Telephoning
Example: dialing phone numbers
Start the dialog:
Press the
button on the steering wheel.
You say
The voice control answers
{Dial number}
{{Please say the number}}
e.g. {123 456 7890}
Depending on equipment:
{{123 456 7890. Continue?}} or
{{123 456 7890. And next?}}
{Dial}
{{Dialing number}}
Setting volume of instructions
Correcting phone number
You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:
After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.
Deleting phone number
{Delete}
Turn the knob during instructions.
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.
3. {Dial}.
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Voice phone book
Operating by voice requires a personal voice
phone book.
> With separate drives for audio CDs and navigation DVDs, the entries are automatically
adopted from your mobile phone's memory.
> With a single drive, the entries must be
input by voice and are independent of your
mobile phone's memory. In this case, it is
not possible to use voice command either
to call phone numbers stored in the mobile
phone or to store new numbers. Up to
50 entries can be input. An entry always
consists of a name and phone number.
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
3. Say the phone number after being
requested to do so by the system.
4. To store the phone number:
{Save}.
Delete entry:
You can delete any entry from the voice phone
book.
1. {Delete name}.
The dialog for deleting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
Delete all entries:
{Delete phone book} deletes all entries in the
phone book.
1. {Delete phone book}.
The dialog for deleting phone book is
opened.
2. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
3. Confirm the repeated prompt with
{Yes}.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
Redialing
At a glance
Controls
2. Say the name when prompted.
The {Redial} command calls up "Redial".
Notes
Important for voice commands
For voice commands, keep the following in
mind:
> Issue the commands smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis
and pauses.
> Keep the doors and windows closed to prevent interference from ambient noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Mounting/removing snap-in
adapter
1. Press the area 1 around the button and
remove the cover.
Have entries read aloud and dial:
You can have all the entries of your voice phone
book read aloud in the order of input and select
a certain entry to establish a connection:
1. {Read phone book}.
The dialog for reading phone book is
opened.
2. {Dial number} when the desired entry is
read aloud.
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
2. Say the name.
The spoken length of the names in the
phone book must not exceed approx.
2 seconds.
Navigation
1. {Save name}.
1. {Dial name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.
Communications Entertainment
An entry always consists of a name and phone
number.
The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.
Mobility
Save entry:
Selecting an entry
Reference
Creating and editing voice phone
book*
Telephoning
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front and
press down until it engages.
To protect the vehicle's batteries, avoid
using the phone when the ignition is
switched off.<
Removing mobile phone
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press the area 1 around the button.
Press button.
Inserting mobile phone
1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile
phone's antenna connector if necessary, so
that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.
2. With the buttons facing upward, press the
mobile phone toward the electrical connections and press down until it engages.
From radio readiness or with the steering
unlocked the mobile phone's battery is
charged.
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
You can use BMW Assist when the following
requirements are met:
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged
on to a mobile phone network. This network
must be capable of transmitting the services.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
> In order to activate and update BMW Assist,
a GPS signal must be available.
> You have subscribed to BMW Assist with
your BMW center or with the BMW Assist
Response Center. Enabling must have
been completed.
> BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 196.
> Enhanced roadside assistance:
You can call Roadside Assistance* of the
BMW Group should you require help in the
event of a breakdown. If possible, the vehicle and position data are transmitted in the
process.
> BMW Customer Relations:
For information related to your vehicle, call
BMW Customer Relations.
> TeleService:
The data on the service status of your vehicle or on required inspections are transmitted to your BMW center either automatically prior to the due date or when you
request a BMW service appointment.
> Remote door unlock:
Inform the BMW Assist Response Center,
e.g. if your remote control is not available
and you want to have the vehicle unlocked.
> Stolen vehicle recovery:
After your vehicle has been reported to the
police as stolen, the BMW Assist Response
Center can locate its position. To do this,
the vehicle electronics must be ready for
operation.
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
Driving tips
> Automatic collision notification:
Under certain conditions a connection is
established to the BMW Assist Response
Center directly following a serious accident.
If possible, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to
help you.
Navigation
Requirements
> Emergency request, refer to page 224:
When you press the SOS button, a connection is established to the BMW Assist
Response Center. The BMW Assist
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
Communications Entertainment
After your contract has expired, the BMW
Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW
Assist Response Center without you having to
visit a BMW center. Following the deactivation
of the BMW Assist systems, no BMW Assist
service is available. The BMW Assist system be
reactivated by a BMW center after signing a
new contract.
The following services are available via
BMW Assist:
Mobility
Many BMW Assist services depend on the individually agreed contract.
Offered services
Reference
BMW Assist provides you with various services.
For example, the position data of your vehicle
can be transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center if an emergency request* has
been initiated.
At a glance
BMW Assist*
BMW Assist
In addition, you can be provided with other services, e.g. the concierge service or information
on route planning, traffic conditions, and the
weather. With Critical Calling, you can make a
limited number of calls via the BMW Assist
Response Center, e.g. if you do not have your
mobile phone with you.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center, see below.
The BMW Assist Response Center is contacted.
Roadside assistance
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
You also have access to the BMW Assist concierge service via the Internet.
Characteristics of the offered services
The following characteristics apply to the services:
> The services offered are country-specific.
> Voice contact is established or data are
transferred, depending on the equipment
and the country. In some countries, it is
possible to do both.
> The data transmitted can, for example, be
the vehicle data, your current position or the
CBS Condition Based Service data.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "BMW Assist" is selected
and press the controller.
Using services
Contacting BMW Assist Response
Center
You can contact the BMW Assist Response
Center via the SOS button.
1. Briefly press protective cover to open.
With some vehicle equipment packages or
in the Convertible, the arrangement of the
switches and indicator lamps may differ
somewhat.
4. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press
the controller.
If the location can be determined, the current vehicle position is displayed.
2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
6. Select "Service notification" and press the
controller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you to the Roadside Assistance of the
BMW Group.
At a glance
5. Select "Start service" and press the controller.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the controller.
Manual service notification
You can transmit data regarding your vehicle's
service status to your BMW center when you
wish to arrange a service appointment.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "BMW Assist" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Select "Service" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.
Mobility
4. Select "Service Request".
Navigation
The data on the service status of your vehicle or
on required inspections are transmitted automatically prior to the due date. You can check
when the BMW center was notified.
Communications Entertainment
Automatic service notification*
Driving tips
Controls
TeleService
6. Select "Start service" and press the controller.
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
5. Press the controller.
BMW Assist
The data relevant for service are transmitted.
Your BMW center will contact you to set up an
appointment for service.
Contacting BMW Customer Relations
For information on all aspects of your vehicle,
you can contact BMW Customer Relations.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "BMW Assist" is selected
and press the controller.
Concierge service*
When you call the concierge service of
BMW Assist, you can, for example, obtain information on current events, filling stations or
hotels and have their phone numbers and
addresses transmitted. Many hotels can be
booked directly through the BMW Assist Concierge service.
The concierge service must be enabled separately by the BMW Assist Response Center.
Calling up information
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "BMW Assist" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Select "Customer Relations".
4. Select "Concierge" and press the controller.
5. Press the controller.
6. Select "Start service" and press the controller.
You are connected to the BMW Hotline by the
BMW Assist Response Center.
5. Select "Start Service" and press the controller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you with a BMW Assist Concierge.
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Select the received message if necessary and
press the controller.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Dialing a phone number or transferring
an address for destination guidance
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service settings" is selected and press the controller.
2. Select a menu item:
> With "Call" you can establish a telephone
connection. A prerequisite for this is that
your Bluetooth mobile phone has been
paired with the vehicle.
> Press "Select as destination" to transfer the
address to the navigation system for destination guidance.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service Status" is selected
and press the controller.
The currently available BMW Assist services are displayed.
6. If applicable, select "Options" and press the
controller.
Updating BMW Assist
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
1. Select "Options" and press the controller.
Driving tips
Controls
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
At a glance
Displaying transmitted data
7. Select "Update services" and press the
controller.
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
You will be notified of any changes in the services offered by BMW Assist. In this case, you
should update the service functions.
Mobility
Displaying and updating services
BMW Assist
Blocking services*
Activating BMW Assist
If you block the services, the connection to
BMW Assist is deactivated.
BMW Assist must be activated to use the services.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
Requirements
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service settings" is selected and press the controller.
> Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current position. Reception is best when
you have an unobstructed view to the sky.
> Leave radio readiness switched on during
the activation process.
Activating
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service Status" is selected
and press the controller.
6. Select "Options" and press the controller.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
7. Select "Terminate services" and press the
controller.
The use of BMW Assist is blocked, and the current vehicle position will not be transmitted during an emergency request*. To cancel blocking
and reactivate BMW Assist, see below. This
does not affect the contractual agreements.
Reactivate BMW Assist if necessary to log on
again.
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Displaying vehicle data
When BMW Assist is activated, the license
plate and the vehicle identification number of
your vehicle may be displayed.
At a glance
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service settings" is selected and press the controller.
1. Open the start menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
Activation takes a few minutes. The status is
displayed on the Control Display. If you open
another menu, the activation process continues
to run in the background.
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Profile" is selected and
press the controller.
Mobility
6. Select "Enable services" and press the controller.
BMW Assist is activated and the data
exchange with the BMW Assist Response
Center begins.
Reference
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.
Navigation
Driving tips
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service Status" is selected
and press the controller.
Controls
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance
and roadside assistance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Refueling
Refueling
Switch off the engine before refueling,
otherwise no fuel can be filled into the
tank and a message is displayed.<
Otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury
and property damage.<
When handling fuel, always observe all
applicable precautionary measures and
regulations. Never transport reserve fuel containers in the vehicle. They can leak and cause
an explosion or a fire in an accident.<
Fuel filler door
Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler door.
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Avoid raising the filler
nozzle during refueling, otherwise this
> results in premature pump shutoff
> can lead to reduced efficiency in the fuelvapor recovery system
To open and close: briefly press the rear edge of
the fuel filler door.
Unlocking manually
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 18.5 US gal/70 liters, including the
reserve capacity of approx.4 US gal/15 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Fuel filler cap
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
release the fuel filler door manually:
In the luggage compartment, pull the knob with
the gas pump symbol on the right side panel.
Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels, follow the safety
precautions posted at the filling station.
Closing
Insert the cap and turn it clockwise until there is
a clearly audible click.
Do not crush the band attached to the
cap; otherwise, the cap may not properly
seal and fuel vapors can escape.<
A message* is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
The minimum approved fuel grade is AKI 91.
Do not use gasoline below the specified
minimum quality, otherwise engine damage can result.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has demonstrated significant
differences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for
sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels
containing up to and including 10% ethanol or
other oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by
weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol
plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will
not void the applicable warranties with respect
to defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
problems relating to drivability and starting, and to a tendency to stall, especially under
certain environmental conditions such as high
ambient temperature and high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Always use this premium grade fuel to obtain
maximum fuel economy and performance.
Navigation
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 93
Communications Entertainment
Required fuel
Mobility
Never used leaded gasoline; it will permanently damage the catalytic converter.
Do not use E85, i.e. fuel that consists of 85%
ethanol, or Flex Fuel. Otherwise permanent
damage to the engine and the fuel supply system will result.<
Reference
Fuel specifications
Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressures for driving
up to 100 mph/160 km/h
Information for your safety
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,
adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
column for traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h to achieve optimum driving
comfort.
The condition of the tires and the maintenance
of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only
to the tire's service life, but also to driving comfort and most importantly, driving safety.
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct if necessary, including on the
spare wheel*: at least twice a month and before
starting long trips. Otherwise, driving instability
or tire damage, and therefore accidents, can
result from incorrect tire inflation pressures.<
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 86, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 88.<
Pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
These pressure specifications can be found on
the door post when you open the driver's door.
The permissible top speed for these tire
inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h.
Do not exceed this speed; otherwise, tire damage and accidents may result.<
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph/160 km/h
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes and tire brands respectively
approved and recommended by BMW; a list of
these is available from your BMW center.<
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please
note the tire pressures for speeds exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h listed in the relevant column
of the table on the following pages and adjust
your tire inflation pressures as needed. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.<
For correct identification of the right tire inflation pressure for your tires, observe the following:
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the law could
occur.
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/45 R 18 100 V XL M+S
35/240
38/260
35/240
38/260
41/280
46/320
255/40 ZR 19
33/230
-
33/230
-
41/280
-
285/35 ZR 19
-
36/250
-
36/250
-
46/320
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 235.
Tire inflation pressures for M6 Convertible
Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
Navigation
Traveling speeds
up to max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/45 R 18 100 V XL M+S
35/240
38/260
35/240
38/260
41/280
46/320
255/40 ZR 19
32/220
-
32/220
-
41/280
-
285/35 ZR 19
-
35/240
-
35/240
-
46/320
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 235.
Communications Entertainment
Tire size
Controls
Tire size
Driving tips
Tire inflation pressures for M6 Coupe
Wheels and tires
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
BMW recommends replacing all tires at least
every 6 years, even if some tires may last for
10 years. This also concerns the tire of the
spare wheel*.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Tire size
e.g.
285/35 ZR 19
245/45 R 18 100 V
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Belted construction – radial
Rim diameter in inches
Carrying capacity ID-code
(not in ZR tires)
Speed code letter
(in ZR tires before the R)
Speed letter
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
Tread wear
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half, 1γ, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Z = over 150 mph/240 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
e.g.
DOT xxxx xxx 3307
Manufacturer code
for tire make
Tire size and tire design
Tire age
Tire age
The tire's date of manufacture is indicated on
the sidewall:
DOT ... 3307 indicates that the tire was manufactured in week 33 of 2007.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
These grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.<
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than summer tires.
XL
Indicates specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and foreign objects lodged in
the tread, and check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legislation only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/
3 mm, there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
In these cases reduce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires
inspected immediately. To do this, carefully
drive to the nearest BMW center or a specialized tire dealer that works in accordance with
BMW guidelines and uses appropriately trained
personnel. Have the vehicle towed to the repair
shop if necessary. Otherwise, tire damage can
be extremely dangerous to vehicle occupants
and other road users.<
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Driving tips
Controls
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more susceptible to road hazards and consequential damages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for example, be caused by driving over curbs. These
kinds of problems may also be signaled by other
changes in vehicle response, such as a strong
tendency to pull to the left or right.
Navigation
M+S
Wheel/tire damage
Communications Entertainment
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
Wear indicators at the tread-groove base, refer
to arrow, are distributed over the tire's circumference and are marked on the side of the tire
with TWI – Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread
has been driven down to the wear indicators, a
tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been
reached.
Mobility
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Winter tires noticeably loose their suitability for
winter use below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm.
New tires should be mounted in the interest of
safety.
Reference
Temperature
Wheels and tires
New wheels and tires
Only have new wheels and tires mounted
by a BMW center or a repair shop that
works in accordance with BMW guidelines and
uses appropriately trained personnel. If this
work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are balanced.<
Wheels with electronics for
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor
When mounting new tires or converting from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics, otherwise the
Tire Pressure Monitor cannot detect a flat tire,
refer to page 87. Your BMW center will be
happy to advise you on this subject.
Recommended tire brands
Retreaded tires
BMW does not recommend the use of
retreaded tires; otherwise, driving safety
may be reduced. Potentially substantial variations in the design and the age of the carcasses
can result in a reduced service life.<
The right wheels and tires
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufacturing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions than the
approved units – these differences could lead to
body contact, and with it the risk of severe accidents. When selecting the tires, also ensure
that they have a sufficient load-carrying capacity. If non-approved wheels and tires are used,
BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, and
therefore cannot be held liable for driving
safety.<
BMW recommends particular tire brands for
each tire size. You can recognize these from the
clearly visible BMW marking on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling characteristics.
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold
winter driving conditions. Although all-season
M+S tires provide better winter traction than
summer tires, they generally fail to provide the
same levels of cold-weather performance as
winter tires.
You can find out the right wheel-tire combination from your BMW center.
Watch speed
The right wheel-and-tire combination is
another vital factor in ensuring reliable operation of various vehicle systems such as ABS
and DSC.
Always observe the maximum permissible speed for the winter tires, otherwise
tire damage may occur, which can result in accidents.<
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single tread configuration from a single manufacturer. After a tire is
damaged, always remember to have the original
wheel and tire combination remounted on the
vehicle as soon as possible.
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
2. Pull both shift paddles for approx. 2 seconds.
If you do not carry out initialization, the system
will automatically learn the changed state gradually during driving. This may be noticeable
from the clutch opening and closing briefly.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Always
protect tires against all contact with oil, grease
and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of
the tire.
Rotating wheels between axles
BMW does not recommend moving the front
wheels to the rear or vice versa, as otherwise
the handling characteristics may be impaired.
With tires of different makes and types* such a
change is not permissible.
Snow chains*
BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains,
classifies them as road-safe and recommends
them. Consult your BMW center for more information.
At a glance
Controls
1. Move the selector lever into the idling
position N on a straight stretch of road at a
speed between 20 mph/30 km/h and
90 mph/150 km/h.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
installing snow chains as this could cause
the Flat Tire Monitor to malfunction.
After mounting or removing snow chains, the
slip detection of the Sequential Manual Transmission must become familiar with the altered
state. To do this, reinitialize the system, refer to
After changing wheels/tires.<
Driving tips
Reinitialize the system for this purpose:
Navigation
After changing tires or wheels, the slip detection of the Sequential Manual Transmission
must become familiar with the changed state.
Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tensioned. Readjust tension in accordance with the chain manufacturer's specifications if necessary.
Communications Entertainment
After changing wheels/tires
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h with the chains mounted.
Mobility
Use is only permitted in pairs, with winter tires
of the size 245/45 R 18 on the rear wheels.
Under the hood
Under the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without
the required professional technical training. If
you are unfamiliar with the specifications to be
observed, only have work carried out on your
vehicle by a BMW center or a repair shop that
works in accordance with BMW guidelines and
uses appropriately trained personnel. Otherwise, there is a danger of damage and associated safety risks if this work is performed
improperly.<
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.
Hood
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may
result.
If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while you are driving your vehicle,
you should stop at once and close it securely.<
Releasing
Pull lever.
Opening
Press the release handle and open the hood.
You cannot start off with the hood open.<
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
2
Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 213
3
Jump-starting terminal, refer to page 225
4
Body ground/negative terminal
5
Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp
and windshield cleaning systems, refer to
page 67
At a glance
Communications Entertainment
Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
1
Navigation
Driving tips
Controls
Engine compartment
Under the hood
Engine oil
Possible displays
Engine oil consumption depends on driving
style and driving conditions.
Checking engine oil level
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil
level check.
The oil level can be displayed when the engine
is at operating temperature. Constant shortdistance driving or a very sporty driving style
can make it impossible for a measurement to be
taken.
Displays in instrument cluster
You can display the current oil level in the
instrument cluster.
1
Oil level
2
Maximum marking
3
Minimum marking
4
BC button
1
Oil level OK
2
Oil level is being determined.
This process can take approx. 1 minute
when stopped on a level surface and
approx. 5 minutes while driving.
If the engine oil has been topped off, the
measurement of the oil level can take up to
30 minutes.
3
Oil level at minimum:
Add a maximum of 1 US quart/1 liter of
engine oil at the next opportunity, refer to
Adding engine oil below Add at least
0.5 US quart/0.5 liter. Otherwise the oil
level control may not display the new value
correctly.
If the oil level displayed is below minimum,
add engine oil immediately. Failure to do so
may lead to engine damage.
4
Oil level is too high
Press the button 4 in the turn signal lever
repeatedly until the display for the oil level
appears in the instrument cluster.
Manual transmission: the fluid level will be
shown in the lower display.<
The oil level must be between the two marks.
A new measurement is automatically taken
after each engine start.
Have the vehicle checked immediately; otherwise, engine damage may
result if too much oil has been added.<
5
No value can be determined at this time.
Engine is not yet at operating temperature.
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
2. Allow the engine to run at idle.
5. After approx. 1 minute the current oil level is
displayed.
Displaying via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Info sources" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Service" is
selected and press the controller.
At a glance
Possible messages
> "Engine oil level O.K."
> "No measurement available: Updating
engine oil level measurement...":
Engine oil level is being measured. This
process can take approx. 1 minute when
stopped on a level surface with the engine
running and approx. 5 minutes while driving.
If the engine oil has been topped off, the
measurement of the oil level can take up to
30 minutes.
> "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart
of engine oil.":
Add a maximum of 1 US quart/1 liter of
engine oil at the next opportunity, refer to
Adding engine oil below. Add at least
0.5 US quart/0.5 liter. Otherwise the oil
level control may not display the new value
correctly.
If the oil level displayed is below minimum,
add engine oil immediately. Failure to do so
may lead to engine damage.
> "Engine oil level too high":
Have the vehicle checked immediately; otherwise, engine damage may
result if too much oil has been added.<
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation
4. Press the BC button for at least 2 seconds.
The oil level is determined. A clock symbol
is displayed during the measurement.
6. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. Turn the controller until "Engine
oil level" is selected and press the controller. The oil level is displayed.
Communications Entertainment
3. Press the BC button in the turn signal lever
repeatedly until the oil level display is
shown in the instrument cluster.
Driving tips
Controls
1. With the engine at operating temperature,
i.e. after at least 6 miles/10 km of uninterrupted driving, park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
Mobility
In addition to the automatic measurement, you
can also determine the current oil level manually, e.g. after adding engine oil, but with a lower
degree of measuring accuracy.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.
Reference
Fast measurement
Under the hood
> "Please observe recalculated service interval for engine oil":
Do not add engine oil. Before continuing to
drive, note the recalculated remaining mileage until the next oil change service, refer to
Service requirements on page 72. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Approved engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has critical
significance for the operation and service life of
an engine. BMW continuously approves specific oils after confirming their suitability for use
in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Do not use oil additives; under some circumstances, they can damage your
engine.<
Your BMW center will be happy to answer
detailed questions on BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic
oils.<
You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website at
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.
Do not add oil until a value slightly above the
minimum of 0.0 US quarts/liters is displayed by
the oil level measurement. In this area a message is also shown on the Control Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,
otherwise the engine could be damaged.
Add a maximum of 1 US quart/1 liter of oil, otherwise the engine may be damaged by adding
too much oil.
Add at least 0.5 US quart/0.5 liter of oil, otherwise the oil level check cannot reliably display
the current oil level.<
Please conduct a quick measurement
after adding engine oil to check the oil
quantity added and to update the display.<
Continuous exposure to used oil has
caused cancer in laboratory testing.
For this reason, thoroughly wash exposed areas
of skin with soap and water after such work.
Keep oil, grease, etc. out of reach of children
and observe warnings on containers. Failure to
do so could pose health risks.<
Oil change
Have oil changes carried out only by a BMW
center or a repair shop that works in accordance
with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately
trained personnel.
Viscosity grades
The viscosity is a measure of the thickness of
the oil and is specified in SAE grades.
Approved oils belong to the SAE grade
10W-60.<
Alternative oil types
If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is
unavailable, you can add small quantities of
other synthetic oils between oil changes.
Only use oils with the following specifications:
> Viscosity
preferred: SAE 10W-60;
alternative: SAE 10W-40, SAE 5W-50 or
SAE 10W-50
> Specification
API SJ/CF, API SK/CF or higher
Low temperatures
The oils used by BMW from the factory for your
M6 can be used at virtually any ambient temperature. However, if the vehicle is operated for
a longer period at temperatures below –47/–
206, your BMW center will be happy to recommend a suitable oil.
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Always observe all applicable environmental laws and regulations when disposing of used coolant additives.<
Checking coolant level
1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counterclockwise to allow any accumulated pressure to escape, then continue turning to
open.
3. The coolant level is correct when the upper
end of the float rod is at the same height as
the upper edge of the filler neck, also refer
to the drawing next to the filler neck.
At a glance
Controls
Only use suitable additives, otherwise
engine damage may result. The additives
present a health hazard.<
Driving tips
Coolant is composed of equal parts water and a
coolant additive. Not all commercially available
additives are suitable for your BMW. Ask your
BMW center for suitable additives.
Navigation
Do not open the cooling system when the
engine is hot. Escaping coolant can cause
burns.<
Communications Entertainment
Coolant
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level – do not overfill.
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.
Mobility
5. Turn the cap until it clicks.
Maintenance
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
> Vehicle check
> Legally required tests depending on local
regulations
Service data in remote control
The BMW Maintenance System supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The service schedule also
includes operations related to the vehicle's
comfort and convenience features, such as
replacement of the filters for the inside air.
The ultimate objective is to ensure economical
maintenance by providing the ideal service for
your vehicle.
Should the day come when you decide to sell
your BMW, you will find that a complete dealer
service history is an asset of inestimable value.
CBS Condition Based Service
Sensors and special algorithms take the different driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
You can set the Control Display to show
remaining distances and times of selected
maintenance intervals and legally mandated
deadlines, refer to page 72:
> Engine oil
Your vehicle stores the information required for
maintenance continuously in the remote control during driving. After accessing the data
stored in the remote control, your BMW Service
Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of
service procedures for your own individual vehicle. For this reason, when you take your vehicle
in for service, you should give the BMW Service
Advisor the remote control last used to drive it.
Make sure the date is set correctly, refer
to page 79, otherwise the effectiveness
of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet
for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service requirements.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service procedures are confirmed by entries in your vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the specified regular maintenance.<
> Brake pads, front and rear separately
> Brake fluid
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Components which are decisive for the
exhaust-gas composition can be checked via
the OBD socket with a device.
Important information on care and maintenance
of your BMW is contained in the Caring for your
vehicle brochure.
This socket is located under a cover on the left
side of the driver's footwell, directly under the
instrument panel.
Exhaust-gas values
The warning lamp lights up. The
exhaust-gas values are deteriorating.
Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction on Canadian models.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine. In
this case, you should reduce speed and drive to
the nearest BMW center as soon as possible.
Heavy engine misfiring causes serious damage
to the emission-relevant components, especially the catalytic converter, within a short time.
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Reference
Mobility
If the fuel filler cap is not properly tightened, the OBD system can detect the
escape of fuel vapor. This causes a display to
light up. If the cap is then tightened, the display
should go out within a few days.<
Controls
Care
Driving tips
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or several measuring and diagnosis modules, or with a
device for recording or transmitting certain
vehicle data or information. If you have also subscribed to BMW Assist, then certain vehicle
data can be transmitted or recorded to enable
corresponding services.
Navigation
Event data recorders
Communications Entertainment
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnostics interface
Replacing components
Replacing components
Onboard tool kit
Never touch the glass on new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its
metal socket.<
A selection of replacement bulbs is available at
your BMW center.
The onboard tool kit is located in the luggage
compartment under the floor mat.
Replacing wiper blades
Whenever you perform any work on the
electrical system, turn off the electrical
devices involved to prevent short circuits from
occurring. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, follow any
instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.<
When performing maintenance on the headlamps, follow the instructions in the separate
Caring for your vehicle brochure.
For bulbs for which changing is not
described, and for checking and adjusting
headlamp aim, please contact your BMW center.<
Light-emitting diodes LEDs
1. Fold the wiper arm out and grasp it firmly.
2. Press the locking tabs together while sliding the wiper blade toward the front to disengage it.
3. Insert the new wiper blade and slide it in
until it audibly clicks into place.
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to driving safety. You must be duly diligent
in replacing them. If you are not familiar with the
specified procedures, have the corresponding
work carried out at your BMW center.
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translucent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a
concept similar to that applied in conventional
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 lightemitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several
hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<
Xenon lamps
The service life of these lamps is very long and
the probability of a failure is very low, provided
that they are not switched on and off an unusual
number of times.
Have work on the xenon lighting system
performed only by your BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
Tail lamps
The parking lamps, tail lamps, brake
lamps, and turn signals use LED technology. The backup lamps are equipped with longlife bulbs. Please contact a BMW center in case
of a malfunction.<
Controls
Parking lamps, roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lamps
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left by 90 5 and
remove.
Driving tips
procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Due to the high voltage involved, there
is a danger to life and limb when work is carried
out improperly.<
The illustration shows the front left side of the
engine compartment.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
Always wear gloves and eye protection –
the atmosphere inside the H8 bulb is
pressurized. Otherwise, there is a danger of
injuries if the bulb is accidentally damaged during replacement.<
1
Turn signals
2
Roadside parking, tail and brake lamp
3
Reflector
4
Backup lamp
License plate lamps
Side-mounted turn signals
5-watt bulb, WY5W
1. Press against the front edge of the lamp
with the tip of your finger, then push it to the
rear, release the snap connection at the
front and take it off the trim strip.
5-watt bulb, W5W
Communications Entertainment
1. Remove the cover cap 1 by pressing the tab
and removing the cover cap upward.
Navigation
35-watt bulb, H 8
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left by 90 5 and
remove.
Mobility
1. Push a screwdriver from the left under the
lamp and pry out the lamp toward the right.
Replacing components
Repairing flat tire with
M Mobility System
Pull the sticker for the speed limit off the sealant
bottle and apply it to the steering wheel.
To repair a flat tire, an M Mobility System is provided in the BMW M6. Using this system you
can apply a sealant in the inside of the tire, seal
off the damaged area, restore the tire inflation
pressure and then continue driving.
The M Mobility System consists of
Safety measures in case of a breakdown:
Park the vehicle as far as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground. Switch on
the hazard warning flashers.
Apply the handbrake and shift into first gear or
reverse with the manual transmission, or move
the selector lever into a drive position with the
sequential transmission. Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they
remain outside the immediate area in a safe
place, such as behind a guardrail.
If a warning triangle* or portable hazard warning
lamp* is required, set it up on the roadside at an
appropriate distance from the rear of the vehicle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.<
Please observe the best-by date on the
sealant bottle.<
1
Sealant bottle and sticker with speed limit
2
Filling hose from sealant bottle to wheel
Model with pressure gauge on hose*
Preparation
The M Mobility System is located in the luggage compartment under the floor panel flap.
Do not remove foreign bodies which have penetrated the tire if possible.
Corresponding information on using the
M Mobility System are also provided on
the device.<
Before using the M Mobility System,
observe the information on the sealant
bottle.<
3
Connector and cable for lighter socket
4
Mounting for sealing bottle
5
Compressor
6
On/Off switch
7
Pressure gauge for indicating tire inflation
pressure
8
Screw on pressure gauge for reducing tire
inflation pressure
9
Connecting hose for connecting compressor and sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connector, cable and connecting hose are
stored in the compressor housing.
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
4. Screw dust cap off valve of defective wheel
and screw filling hose 2 of sealant bottle
onto valve.
Compressor
6
On/Off switch
7
Pressure gauge for indicating tire inflation
pressure
8
Button for reducing tire inflation pressure
9
Connecting hose for connecting compressor and sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connector, cable and connecting hose are
stored on underside of compressor.
Using M Mobility System
To repair a flat tire with the M Mobility System,
proceed as follows:
> Fill sealant into wheel, refer to page 219.
> Distribute sealant, refer to page 219.
> Produce tire inflation pressure, refer to
page 219.
Filling sealant into wheel
Strictly comply with the specified order,
otherwise highly pressurized sealant
could escape.<
1. Shake sealant bottle.
2. Screw hose 9 onto connection of sealant
bottle.
3. For model with pressure gauge on hose:
Make sure that screw 8 on pressure gauge
is closed.
6. Make sure that device is switched off,
position 0.
7. Insert connector 3 into lighter socket in
vehicle interior, refer to page 112.
8. With the ignition switched on, refer to
page 59:
Switch on the device and allow to run for
approx. 3 minutes to fill wheel with sealant.
It is not important what inflation pressure
the tire has after filling.
9. Switch off device.
10. Remove connecting hose from connection
of sealant bottle and tire valve.
Stow the M Mobility System in the vehicle
again.
Distributing sealant
Immediately drive approx. 2 miles/3 km so that
sealant is evenly distributed in tire.
Do not exceed a maximum speed of
35 mph/60 km/h. Do not drop below
12 mph/20 km/h if possible.<
Navigation
Mounting for sealing bottle
5
Communications Entertainment
4
Producing tire inflation pressure
1. After approx. 2 miles/3 km, stop at suitable
location.
2. Screw compressor hose 9 directly onto tire
valve.
3. Insert connector 3 in lighter socket in vehicle interior.
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
Connector and cable for lighter socket
Reference
3
Driving tips
Controls
5. Insert sealant bottle on compressor housing so that it is positioned upright.
At a glance
Model with pressure gauge integrated
in housing*
Replacing components
4. Correct tire inflation pressure to 29 psi/
200 kPa. With the ignition switched on:
> Increase inflation pressure: switch on
device, position I. To check currently set
inflation pressure, briefly switch off
device.
Do not allow compressor to run
longer than 10 minutes, otherwise
the device will overheat and may be damaged.<
> Reduce inflation pressure: press
button 8 or turn screw 8 on pressure
gauge.
If the inflation pressure is not held, drive
the vehicle again, refer to Distributing
sealant. Then repeat steps 1 to 4 once.
Using the M Mobility System can be ineffective
with tire damage from a size of approx. 0.16 in/
4 mm. Please contact the nearest BMW center,
refer to page 225, or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel if the tire cannot be made ready for driving with the
M Mobility System.<
The tire inflation pressure must be at least
29 psi/200 kPa. Otherwise, do not continue driving.<
Continue driving
the selector lever into a drive position with the
sequential transmission.
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
If a warning triangle* or portable hazard warning
lamp* is required, set it up on the roadside at an
appropriate distance from the rear of the vehicle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.
Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface
which is not slippery. The vehicle or the jack
could slip to the side if you attempt to raise the
vehicle on a soft or slippery surface such as
snow, ice, tiles, etc.
Position the jack on a firm support surface.
Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a
support base for the jack, as this would prevent
it from extending to its full support height and
reduce its load-carrying capacity.
To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under
the vehicle, and never start the engine while it is
supported by the jack.<
What you will need
To avoid rattling noises later on, note the positions of the tools before removing them, then
return them to their initial positions after completing work.
Do not exceed the permissible maximum
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h, otherwise
accidents can occur.<
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
For details, refer to page 86.
Have the defective tire and the sealant bottle of
the M Mobility System replaced as soon as
possible.<
Changing wheels*
1
Chock*
2
Vehicle jack*
Safety precautions in the event of a flat
tire or wheel change: park the vehicle as
far as possible from passing traffic and on solid
ground. Switch on the hazard warning flashers.
Apply the handbrake and shift into first gear or
reverse with the manual transmission, or move
3
Lug wrench*
The tools are located in the hollow of the spare
wheel.
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
2. Pull back lock 1, fold open tensioning lock 2
completely and loosen the belt 3.
The vehicle jack is designed for
changing wheels only. Do not attempt
to raise another vehicle model with it or to
raise any load of any kind. To do so could
cause accidents and personal injury.<
Driving tips
2. Guide the jack head into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point when cranking
up, refer to illustration detail.
At a glance
1. Fold up the convertible top compartment
floor, refer to Convertible: increasing luggage compartment capacity, page 35.
1. Position the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel so that the entire surface of the jack base rests on the ground
perpendicularly beneath the jacking point.
Controls
Spare wheel*
3. Remove the cover 4.
Preparing wheel change
1. Observe the safety precautions above.
2. Prevent the vehicle from rolling:
Place the chock behind the front wheel on
the other side of the vehicle, or on inclines,
in front of this wheel. On steeply inclined
roads, always secure the vehicle against
rolling.
3. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking up vehicle
3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are
changing is raised from the ground.
Mounting a wheel
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from
the mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub. Also clean the lug bolts.
3. Position the new wheel or spare wheel.
Secure the wheel by screwing at least two
lug bolts into opposite bolt holes.
When you mount wheels other than Genuine BMW light-alloy wheels, different lug
bolts may also be required.
Communications Entertainment
5. Remove the spare wheel.
Navigation
4. Take the tool mounting out of the spare
wheel.
The jacking points for the car jack are located in
the positions shown.
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack from
beneath the vehicle.
Mobility
4. Screw in the remaining lug bolts. Tighten all
the bolts securely in a diagonal pattern.
Replacing components
After mounting
1. Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.
To ensure safety, always have the
lug bolts checked with a calibrated
torque wrench as soon as possible to
ensure that they are tightened to the specified torque. Otherwise, incorrectly tightened lug bolts are a hidden safety risk. The
tightening torque is 88.5 lb ft/120 Nm.<
Convertible: hook the belt into the lashing
eyes 5 and 7 and lay it in the belt guide of
the lid which runs offset.
2. Check and correct the tire inflation pressure
at the earliest opportunity.
Protect valve stems with valve stem
seal caps against dirt and contamination. Dirt in valve stems is a frequent source
of gradual air loss.<
3. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 86, and the Sequential Manual Transmission, refer to After changing wheels/
tires on page 207.
5. Completely open the tensioning lock.
6. Thread the belt 3 through the axis 6 of the
tensioning lock without twisting it and tension it by hand.
7. Tighten the belt firmly with the tensioning
lock by opening and closing the lock several
times.
4. Replace the damaged tire as soon as possible and have the new wheel/tire balanced.
8. Fold the tensioning lock closed and stow
the protruding belt end.
Stowing wheel and tools
Driving with spare wheel
Convertible: a rear wheel can only be
transported with the convertible top compartment floor folded up.<
With certain wheel-and-tire combinations
the size of the spare wheel differs from
that of the other wheels. The spare wheel is
equivalent to them in all load and speed ranges.
However, to restore the original state, the normal wheel should be remounted as soon as
possible.<
1. Lay the wheel in the tool mounting.
2. Lay the cover on the mounting.
3. Coupe: center the wheel and cover relative
to the lashing eyes 5.
Convertible: slide the wheel as far as possible to the left and to the rear.
4. Coupe: hook the belt into the lashing eyes 5
and lay it in the belt guide which runs in the
center of the lid.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is 100 % maintenance-free, i.e., the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate climate.
Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all
matters concerning the battery.
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
In glove compartment
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine switched off. For the connections, refer
to Jump starting on page 225.
1. Press the button on the back in the center of
partition 1 and pull out the partition upward,
arrow 2.
At a glance
Charging battery
After replacement, have old batteries disposed of by your BMW center or deposit
them at a recycling center. Maintain the battery
in an upright position for transport and storage.
Always secure the battery to prevent it from tipping over during transport.<
In luggage compartment
> Time and date
Reset, refer to text starting on page 77.
> Radio
Store stations again, refer to page 156.
> Navigation system
Wait until the system starts, refer to
page 124.
Fuses
Fold the cover under the floor mat upward and
remove the bracket for the onboard tool kit.
Information on fuse allocation 1 and additional
fuses 2 are provided there.
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse, and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating, as
this could lead to overloading of the wiring, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Spare fuses and a pair of plastic tweezers are
located in the compartment for the onboard tool
kit, refer to page 216.
Information on fuse allocation is located below
the bracket for the onboard tool kit, see below.
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
> Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory
Store the positions again, refer to page 47.
Mobility
After a temporary power supply interruption,
some settings are lost. Take the following
steps:
2. Press the coupling downward, arrow 3, and
fold the lid 4 forward.
Reference
Power failure
Driving tips
Controls
Disposal
Giving and receiving assistance
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency request
Conditions for an emergency request:
The LED in the button lights up. As soon as the
voice connection to the BMW Assist Response
Center has been established, the LED flashes.
> Full preparation package mobile phone.
With this equipment, an emergency request
is still possible when no mobile phone is
paired in the vehicle.
When the emergency request is received at the
BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW Assist
Response Center contacts you and arranges
for additional steps to help you.
> BMW Assist is activated.
Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 196.
If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until
the connection has been established. You will
then be able to provide a detailed description of
the situation.
> Radio readiness is activated.
> The BMW Assist system is logged on to a
mobile phone network.
> The emergency request system is operable.
Once your service contract for BMW Assist
expires, the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by a BMW center without you having to
visit a workshop. Following deactivation of the
BMW Assist system, no emergency requests
can be made. The BMW Assist system can be
reactivated after concluding a new agreement
at a BMW center.
Initiating an emergency request
1. Briefly press protective cover to open.
With some vehicle equipment packages or
in the Convertible, the arrangement of the
switches and indicator lamps may differ
somewhat.
If the current position of your vehicle can be
determined, it will be transmitted to the BMW
Assist Response Center.
If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard over the
hands-free system, it is possible that the
hands-free system is malfunctioning. You may
still be heard by the BMW Assist Response
Center, however.
Under certain conditions, an emergency
request is automatically initiated immediately
after a severe accident. The automatic collision
notification is not affected by the button being
pressed.
For technical reasons, the emergency request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions.
You can also use other services of
BMW Assist with this button, refer to
page 191.<
2. Press the SOS button for at least 2 seconds.
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
The first-aid kit is located in the filler element of
the rear seat backrest.
1. Press the button downward and pull the
filler element forward.
With BMW Assist you can contact the Roadside
Assistance of the BMW Group for assistance in
the event of a breakdown directly via iDrive,
refer to page 192.
Jump starting
When your battery is discharged, you can use
two jumper cables to start your BMW with
power from the battery in a second vehicle. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
2. Take out first-aid kit.
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running. Carefully adhere to the following sequence, both to
prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to
guard against possible personal injuries.<
Preparing
To refit the filler element, insert the two
bottom tabs into the strip and press the
filler element back into place. Make sure that
you do not damage the rear seat upholstery.<
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Switch off any electrical systems and components in both vehicles.
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
First-aid kit*
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assistance in your home country can be found in the
BMW Contact directory.
Navigation
The warning triangle is located on the left-hand
side in the luggage compartment.
BMW Roadside Assistance offers you assistance in the event of a breakdown around the
clock, including on weekends and public holidays.
Communications Entertainment
Roadside Assistance*
Mobility
Some of the articles contained in the first-aid kit
have a limited service life. For this reason, check
the expiration dates of each of the items regularly and replace any whose expiration dates
have passed.
Reference
Warning triangle*
Giving and receiving assistance
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,
there is a danger of short circuiting.<
Connecting jumper cables
To avoid personal injury from sparks,
follow this sequence when connecting
jumper cables.<
In your BMW M6, the so-called jump-starting
terminal for jump starting in the engine compartment serves as a positive terminal for the
battery, also refer to engine compartment overview on page 209. The cover cap is marked with
a +.
1. Fold open the cover of the BMW jumpstarting terminal. To do so, pull the tab.
5. Attach the second end of the cable to the
negative terminal of the battery or to the
engine or body ground of the vehicle to be
started.
Starting engine
1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle
and allow it to run at idle for several minutes
at slightly increased speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+
to the positive terminal of the battery or a
jump-starting terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the second end of the cable to the
positive terminal of the battery or to a jumpstarting terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/–
to the negative terminal of the battery or to
an engine or body ground of the vehicle
providing assistance.
Your BMW M6 has a special nut as body
ground or negative terminal.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the connection sequence.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting and towing
Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using tow fitting
The threaded tow fitting is stored in the tool kit
mounted on the inside of the luggage compartment under the floor mat, refer to page 216, and
should always remain in the vehicle. It can be
screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body
and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.<
In some countries, towing with tow bars or
ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiarize yourself with the regulations on towing in the
respective country.
Rear: press the arrow symbol on the cover while
prying out the cover upward by hand.
With tow bar
The towing vehicle may not be lighter
than the vehicle to be towed; otherwise, it
will not be possible to reliably control vehicle
response.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset
angle, please note the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be strictly limited during cornering.
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 59; otherwise, the low-beam
headlamps, tail lights, turn signals and windshield wipers would not be available. Do not tow
the vehicle with the rear axle raised, as otherwise the steering can turn to the left or right.
When the engine is stopped, there is no power
assist. This then requires increased effort for
braking and steering.<
Switch on the hazard warning flashers depending on the local regulations. If the electrical system fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with
a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.
> When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will
exert lateral forces, tending to push the
vehicle sideways.
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,
as attachment to other vehicle parts can
lead to damage.<
At a glance
Controls
Towing methods
Driving tips
Make sure that selector lever position N is
engaged with the ignition switched on, as
otherwise the engine can be damaged during
towing.<
Navigation
Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic
Communications Entertainment
Front: press the arrow symbol on the cover in
the bumper.
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
With tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach tow ropes to the tow fittings only, as
attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to
damage.<
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
Access to screw thread
Manual transmission
Reference
Only use the tow fitting that comes with
the vehicle and screw it in as far as possible. Use the tow fitting for towing only on roads.
Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do
not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise,
the tow fitting and vehicle can be damaged.<
Giving and receiving assistance
With tow truck
Do not tow the vehicle with only the front
or rear axle raised, as otherwise the
engine may be damaged or the steering can
turn to the left or right.<
4. Move the selector lever into the drive position and pull toward + within 2 seconds.
The correct gear will be selected and
engaged automatically.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warning flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Have the vehicle transported on a flatbed surface only.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle if possible, but
instead start the engine by means of jump starting, refer to page 225. Vehicles equipped with a
catalytic converter should only be tow-started
when the engine is cold.
Manual transmission
1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,
comply with country-specific regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 59.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Tow-start with the clutch completely
depressed and slowly release the clutch.
After the engine starts, immediately
depress the clutch again completely.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warning flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Sequential Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic
1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,
comply with country-specific regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 59.
3. Tow-start in selector lever position N.
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Driving tips
Controls
At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data,
the short commands of the voice command
system, and the index that will direct you
as quickly as possible to the information
you are looking for.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Technical data
Technical data
Engine data
M6
Displacement
cu in/cmμ
No. of cylinders
305.1/4,999
10
Maximum output
hp
at engine speed
rpm
Maximum torque
lb ft/Nm
at engine speed
rpm
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
500
7,750
383/520
6,100
At a glance
Dimensions
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 41.0 ft/12.5 m
Communications Entertainment
Navigation
Driving tips
Controls
Coupe
Technical data
Convertible
All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 41 ft/12.5 m
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Curb weight
lbs./kg
3,909/1,773
4,398/1,995
Approved gross vehicle weight
lbs./kg
4,850/2,200
5,247/2,380
Load
lbs./kg
941/427
849/385
Approved front axle load
lbs./kg
2,403/1,090
2,469/1,120
Approved rear axle load
lbs./kg
2,646/1,200
2,844/1,290
Luggage compartment capacity
cu ft/l
15.9/450
10.6/300
> with raised convertible top
compartment floor, refer to page 35
cu ft/l
–
12.4/350
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
At a glance
M6 Convertible
Controls
M6 Coupe
Driving tips
Weights
US gal/liters
approx. 18.5/70
including reserve of:
US gal/liters
approx. 4/15
Window and headlamp
wiper system
US quarts/liters
approx. 5.3/5
Fuel specification: page 201
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
Mobility
For details: page 67
Communications Entertainment
Notes
Fuel tank
Navigation
Capacities
Short commands of voice command system
Short commands of voice command
system*
With short commands you can run certain functions directly, regardless of which menu item is
selected.
Here are the important short commands for the
voice command system.
Assistance window
Function
Command
To open the assistance window 20
{Assistance window}
To select the display in the assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north},
{Assistance window map direction of travel},
{Assistance window arrow display},
{Assistance window perspective},
{Assistance window current position},
{Assistance window trip computer} or
{Assistance window onboard info}
To change scale in assistance window 124
{Assistance window scale ... feet} or
{Assistance window scale ... miles}
Communication
Function
Command
To activate telephone 183
{Phone}
To dial phone number 183
{Dial number}
To display the phone book 184
{A to Z}
To dial from phone book 184
{Call ...} or
{Dial name}
To display "Top 8" 185
{Top 8}
To redial 185
{Redial}
To display "Received calls" 185
{Received calls}
To display "Missed calls" 185
{Missed calls}
To display "Bluetooth" 177
{Bluetooth}
To open BMW Assist
{BMW Assist}
191
To open BMW Service, Services 191
{BMW Service}
To open "BMW Contact" 185
{BMW Contact}
To open "BMW Contact Numbers" 193
{BMW Contact numbers}
To open "Roadside Assistance" 192
{Roadside Assistance}
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
{New destination}
{Input map}
To display destination list
{Destination list}
To display the address book
{Address book}
To display the route criteria
{Route preference}
To start destination guidance
{Start guidance}
To end destination guidance
{Stop guidance}
To display arrow display
{Arrow display}
To display map view
{Map}, {Map facing north},
{Map direction of travel} or
{Perspective}
To change scale
{Scale ... miles} or
{Scale ... feet}
To display streets and towns/cities of the route
{Route list}
To switch on voice instructions
{Navigation info on}
To switch off voice instructions
{Navigation info off}
To repeat voice instructions
{Repeat navigation info}
To open route
{Route menu}
To display current position
{Current position}
Onboard info
Function
Command
To open "Car Data" 71
{Car data}
To display the computer 71
{Onboard info}
To display the trip computer 72
{Trip computer}
To start the stopwatch 77
{Stopwatch}
To set the speed limit 76
{Limit}
To activate speed limit 77
{Limit on}
To deactivate speed limit 77
{Limit off}
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
To open "New destination"
To display "Input map"
Driving tips
{Enter address}
Navigation
To open "Enter address"
Communications Entertainment
Command
{Navigation}
Mobility
Function
To open navigation 124
Reference
Navigation
Short commands of voice command system
Entertainment
Function
Command
Tone control 151
{Audio}
To switch on radio 154
{Radio on},
{FM} or
{AM}
To open "FM" 154
{FM menu}
To open "AM" 154
{AM menu}
To open "All stations" 154
{FM All stations}
To select the radio station 154
{Station ...}, e.g. {Station WNYC}, or
{Choose station}
To open "Presets" 154
{FM presets} or
{AM presets}
To select preset radio station 154
{Preset ...}, e.g. {Preset 1}
To open "Manual" 155
{FM manual},
{AM manual} or
{Choose frequency},
{Frequency ... Megahertz}
To open the radio station with the best
reception 156
{AM Autostore}
To open "WB" 158
{Weatherband menu}
To switch on weatherband 158
{Weatherband on}
To select a weatherband station 158
{Choose weatherband station}
To open "SAT" 162
{SAT radio menu}
To switch on satellite radio 162
{SAT radio}
To open "Presets" of satellite radio 163
{SAT radio presets}
To open "All channels" of satellite radio 162
{SAT radio all channels}
To open "Categories" of satellite radio 162
{SAT radio categories}
To select CD player 164
{CD menu}
To switch on CD player 164
{CD}
To select CD changer 165
{CD changer menu}
To switch on CD changer 165
{CD changer}
To select a CD in the CD changer 165
{CD 1...6}
To select music track 165
{CD track ...}
To select a CD and music track in the CD
changer 165
{CD 1...6 track ...}
To switch on audio playback with external audio
device 170
{Audio Aux}
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Command
{Vent settings}
To open "Automatic programs" 102
{Automatic programs}
To open "Parked car ventilation" 106
{Parked car operation}
To open "Automatic ventilation" 106
{Automatic ventilation}
To display the activation times 106
{Activation time}
menu
{Info sources}
{Settings}
To open "Door locks" 30, 32
{Door locks}
To open "Steering wheel buttons" 53
{Steering wheel buttons}
To open MDrive* 53
{MDrive}
To open "Lighting" 65, 97
{Lighting}
To open "Service requirements" 73, 193
{Service requirements}
To open "Service" 73, 193
{Service}
To open "BMW Service settings" settings 195
{BMW service settings}
To display "Check Control messages" 74
{Check Control messages}
To open "Head-Up Display" 93
{Head-up display}
To adjust the brightness of the Control
Display 79
{Brightness}
To open "Units" 79
{Units}
To open "Languages" 80, 124
{Language}
To open "Time" 78
{Time}
To open "Date" 79
{Date}
To open "PDC" 82
{PDC}
To open "FTM" 86
{FTM}
To open "TPM" 88
{TPM}
To display "Bluetooth" 177
{Bluetooth}
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation
To open "Info sources"
To open "Settings"
Communications Entertainment
{Settings menu}
{Display off}
Mobility
To open the menu
"Display off" 21
Driving tips
Command
Reference
Function
At a glance
Function
To open "Vent settings" 103
Controls
Climate
Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
"..." Identifies Control Display
texts used to select
individual functions, and
indicates where to find them
in the text.
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 82
– indicator lamp 84
Accepted calls 184
Accessories 6
Accident, refer to Emergency
request 224
Activated-charcoal filter for
automatic climate
control 105
Activating hour signal 78
"Activation time" for parkedcar ventilation 106
Active front head restraints 48
Adapter for spare key 28
Adaptive brake lamps, refer to
Brake force display 90
Adaptive Head Light 98
"Add digits" for mobile
phone 184
Additives
– coolant 213
– engine oil, refer to Approved
engine oils 212
"Address book" for navigation
system 134
Address for navigation
– deleting 135
– entering 126, 129
– selecting 134
– storing 134
– storing current position 134
"Add to address book" 133
"Add to destination
list" 129, 131
Adjusting interior
temperature 102
Adjusting thigh support 46
Adjusting tone in audio mode,
refer to Tone control 151
"After door opened" 48
"After unlocking" 48
Airbags 90
– deactivating, refer to
Exception for front
passenger seat 56
– indicator/warning lamp 92
– indicator lamp for front
passenger airbags 91
– sitting safely 45
Air distribution
– automatic 102
– manual 103
Airing, refer to Ventilation 105
Air outlets, refer to
Ventilation 105
Air recirculation, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air
control 104
"Air recirculation on / off" 53
Air supply, automatic climate
control 101
Air volume 103
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 201
Alarm system 35
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 36
– interior motion sensor 36
– switching off alarm 35
– switching off tilt alarm
sensor and interior motion
sensor 36
– tilt alarm sensor 36
"All channels" 162
"All doors" 30
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 206
"All stations", calling up with
radio 154, 157
Alterations, technical, refer to
For your own safety 6
"AM", reception
range 150, 154
Antenna, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Antenna for mobile phone 176
Antifreeze
– coolant 213
– washer fluid 67
Antilock Brake System
ABS 82
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 35
Anti-theft system, refer to
Central locking system 30
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 235
Approved engine oils 212
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 235
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 110
Around the center console 14
Around the steering wheel 10
Arrival time
– refer to Computer 71
– refer to Starting destination
guidance 138
"Arrow display" for navigation
system 139
"Arrow display pop-up
instructions" 125
Ashtray 111
Assist, refer to
BMW Assist 191
Assistance systems, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 82
Assistance window 20
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 46
Backrests, refer to Seats 46
Backrest width adjustment 46
Backup lamps, replacing
bulbs, refer to Tail
lamps 217
"Balance", refer to Tone
control 152
Band-aids, refer to First-aid
kit 225
Bass, refer to Tone
control 151
"Bass", tone control 151
Battery
– jump starting 225
– refer to Vehicle battery 222
Battery replacement, remote
control for comfort
access 38
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment
B
BC button, refer to
Computer 70
Being towed 227
Belts, refer to Safety belts 50
Beverage holder, refer to Cup
holders 111
Blower, refer to Air
volume 103
"Bluetooth" 177
"BMW Assist" 192
BMW Assist 191
– activating 196
– concierge service 194
– contacting BMW Customer
Relations 194
– displaying vehicle data 197
– offered services 191
– roadside assistance 192
– TeleService 193
– updating 195
"BMW Contact" 186
"BMW Contact
Numbers" 186
BMW homepage 4
BMW Maintenance
System 214
"BMW Service settings" 195
BMW website 4
Bottle holder, refer to Cup
holders 111
Bracket for telephone or
mobile phone, refer to Snapin adapter 189
Brake assistant 83
Brake force display 90
Brake lamps
– replacing bulbs, refer to Tail
lamps 217
– two-stage 90
Brake rotors
– breaking-in 116
– refer to Braking safely 117
Mobility
Automatic station search 155
"Automatic ventilation" 106
AUTO program with
automatic climate
control 102
"Autostore" on the
radio 154, 156
"AUX" 150, 170, 172
– in audio mode 170
AUX-In connection 110, 170
Average fuel consumption 71
– setting units 79
"Avoid ferries" for navigation
system 137
"Avoid highways" for
navigation system 136
Avoiding freeways for
navigation 136
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 36
"Avoid tollroads" for
navigation system 137
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 235
"A - Z" 184
Reference
"Assist. window off" 21
AUC Automatic recirculatedair control 104
"Audio" 151, 153, 158
Audio 150
– controls 150
– switching on/off 150
– tone control 151
– volume 151
Audio device, external 110
Automatic
– air distribution 102
– air volume 102
– cruise control 67
– headlamp control 96
– recirculated-air control
AUC 104
– service notification 193
– steering wheel
adjustment 47
– storing stations 156
Automatic car washes 118
– also refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Automatic climate control 101
– automatic air
distribution 102
– convertible program 102
– switching on and off 105
– ventilation with vehicle
parked 106
Automatic closing of doors,
refer to Automatic soft
closing 34
Automatic curb monitor 52
Automatic lighting
– refer to Automatic headlamp
control 96
– refer to Daytime running
lamps 97
– refer to High-beam
assistant 98
– refer to Interior lamps 100
– refer to Pathway lighting 97
– refer to Welcome lamps 96
"Automatic programs" 102
Automatic soft closing 34
Everything from A to Z
Brakes
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 82
– brake force display 90
– breaking-in 116
– CBC Cornering Brake
Control 82
– electronic brake-force
distribution 83
– handbrake 61
– refer to Braking safely 117
Brake system 116
– brake pads 116
– brake rotors 118
– breaking-in 116
– warning lamp 13, 84
Braking safely 117
Breakdown, M Mobility
System 218
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 225
Breaking-in 116
Breaking-in brake pads 116
Breaking-in the clutch 116
Breaking-in the differential,
refer to Engine and
differential 116
"Brightness" 79, 94
Brightness of Control
Display 79
Button for starting engine,
refer to Start/Stop button 59
Buttons on steering wheel 11
Bypassing route sections 142
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 6
"Call" 184, 195
Call
– accepting 182
– displaying accepted 185
– ending 183
– in absence 185
– rejecting 183
– starting 183
Calling
– by entering phone
number 183
– from phone book 184
– from Top 8 list 185
– redialing 185
Can holder, refer to Cup
holders 111
Capacities 235
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 222
Car care, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Car-care products, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
"Car Data" 71
Care 215
– refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Cargo loading
– securing cargo 119
– stowing cargo 119
– vehicle 118
Caring for artificial leather,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Caring for leather, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for light-alloy wheels,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Caring for plastic, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for the carpet, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for the vehicle finish,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Car key, refer to Keys/remote
control 28
Car phone 176
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 110
– refer to Mobile phone 176
– refer to separate operating
instructions
Car radio, refer to Radio 154
Car wash 118
– refer to Before driving into a
car wash 118
– refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 117
"Categories" 162
CBC Cornering Brake
Control 82
CBS Condition Based
Service 214
"CD" 150, 164
CD changer 164
– controls 150
– fast forward/reverse 168
– installation location 168
– random sequence 167
– repeating a track 167
– sampling a track 166
– selecting a CD 165
– selecting a track 165
– switching on/off 150
– tone control 151
– volume 151
CD player 164
– controls 150
– fast forward/reverse 168
– random sequence 167
– repeating a track 167
– sampling a track 166
– selecting a track 165
– switching on/off 150
– tone control 151
– volume 151
Center armrest, adjusting
height 110
Center console 14
"Central locking" 30
Central locking
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– setting brightness 79
– switching off/on 21
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls, refer to Cockpit 10
Convenient operation
– convertible top 31, 32
– windows 31, 32
Convertible
– convertible program for
automatic climate
control 102
– opening and closing
windows 38
– rollover protection
system 92
– top 40
– wind deflector 43
– window and convertible top
operation with comfort
access 37
Convertible top
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– closing manually 42
– convenient operation 32
– emergency closing 42
– opening and closing 41
Coolant 213
– checking level 213
– temperature 69
Cooling, maximum 104
Cooling function, automatic
climate control 104
Cooling system, refer to
Coolant 213
Copyright 2
Cornering Brake Control
CBC 82
Country of destination for
navigation 127
Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 100
Cradle for telephone or mobile
phone 110
Cruise control 67
Cruising range 71
Cup holders 15, 111
Mobility
Comfort access 36
– replacing battery, remote
control 38
Comfort closing
– windows, with comfort
access with Coupe 37
– with comfort access 37
"Comfort" with EDC 85
"Communication" 182, 192
Compact disc
– refer to CD changer 164
– refer to CD player 164
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 59
Compartments, refer to
Storage compartments 110
Compressed audio files 164
Computer 70
– clock 70
– displays on Control
Display 71
– hour signal 78
"Concert hall", refer to Tone
control 153
"Concierge" 194
Concierge service 194
Condensation, refer to When
vehicle is parked 118
Condition Based Service
CBS 214
"Confirmation" 31
Confirmation signals for
locking and unlocking 31
Connecting car vacuum
cleaner, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 112
Consumption display, refer to
Average fuel
consumption 71
Consumption statistics, refer
to Average fuel
consumption 71
"Continue guidance to
destination?" 139
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Reference
Central locking system 30
– comfort access 36
– hotel function 33
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 6
Changing a wheel 220
Changing language on
Control Display 80
Changing scale for navigation
system display 140
Changing units of measure on
Control Display 79
Changing wheels 206
CHECK button 75
Check Control 74
"Check Control
messages" 75
Check Gas Cap 200
Checking air pressure, refer to
Tire inflation pressure 202
Child-restraint fixing system
LATCH 57
Child restraint systems 56
Child seats, refer to
Transporting children
safely 56
Chock 220
Chrome parts, refer to Caring
for your vehicle brochure
Cigarette lighter 112
Cigarette lighter socket, refer
to Connecting electrical
devices 112
Cleaning, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
"Climate" 102
Clock 70
– 12h/24h format 78
– hour signal 78
– setting time and date 78
Closing
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
Closing fuel filler cap 200
Clothes hooks, Coupe 111
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting
engine 60
Everything from A to Z
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 235
"Current position" 145
Current position
– displaying 145
– entering 134
– storing 134
"Customer
Relations" 186, 194
Cylinders, refer to Engine
data 232
D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Data, technical 232
– capacities 235
– dimensions 233
– engine 232
– measurements 233
– weights 235
"Date" 79
Date
– date format 79
– setting 79
"Date format" 79
"Daytime running
lamps" 97, 100
Daytime running lamps 97
– replacing bulbs 217
DBC Dynamic Brake Control,
warning lamp 85
"Deactivated" 48
Decommissioning the vehicle,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Defect, tires
– refer to Flat Tire Monitor 86
– refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 87
Defrosting windows 103
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation 103
Defrosting windshield, refer to
Defrosting windows 103
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 103
"Delete address book" for
navigation system 135
"Delete all numbers" for
mobile phone 185
"Delete data" for navigation
system 135
"Delete" for mobile
phone 185
Destination address
– deleting 135
– entering 126, 129
Destination for navigation
– destination list 133
– entering via voice 129
– entry 126
– home address 136
– selecting from address
book 134
– selecting using
information 132
– storing 134
Destination guidance 138
– bypassing route
sections 142
– canceling voice
instructions 53
– changing specified
route 136
– displaying route 139
– distance and arrival 138
– interrupting 138
– starting 138
– terminating/continuing 138
– voice instructions 141
– volume of voice
instructions 142
Destination list for
navigation 133
Destinations recently driven
to 133
"Details" in audio
mode 166, 172
"Dial" for mobile phone 183
"Dial number" 183
Digital clock 70
Digital radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 158
Dimensions
– Convertible 234
– Coupe 233
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 65
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 141
Directory, refer to Phone
book 184
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 134
Direct selection buttons 21
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 232
"Display" 79
Display, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Display elements, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Displaying vehicle data 197
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 100
"Display off" 21
Displays
– on Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– refer to Instrument
cluster 12
"Display settings" 79, 93
Displays on the windshield,
refer to Head-Up Display 93
Disposal
– battery of remote control
with comfort access 38
– coolant 213
– vehicle battery 223
Distance, refer to
Computer 71
"Distance to dest." 71
Distance to destination, refer
to Computer 71
Distance warning, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 81
Door entry lighting, refer to
Interior lamps 100
Door key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment
Easy entry, refer to Entering
rear 49
Easy entry/exit 52
"EDC" 54
EDC Electronic Damping
Control 85
– "Comfort" 85
– "Normal" 85
– "Sport" 85
Engine compartment 209
Engine coolant 213
Engine oil
– adding 212
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 212
– approved oils 212
– checking oil level 210
– fast measurement 211
– interval between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 72
– oil change 212
– oil grades, refer to Approved
engine oils 212
– possible displays 210
– recommended oils 212
– temperature 70
– temperature gauge 70
"Engine oil level" 211
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 232
Engine overheating, refer to
Coolant temperature 69
Engine speed, refer to Engine
data 232
Engine starting, refer to
Starting engine 60
"Enter address" 126, 134
Entering address 126, 129
Entering intersection,
navigation 128
Entering rear 49
Entering town/city for
navigation 127
Entering town/city of
destination name 127
Entering zip code for
navigation 127
"Entertainment" 150
Entertainment sound output
on/off 151
Entry map for destination 131
Equalizer, refer to Tone
control 153
"Equalizer", tone control 153
"ESN" 161
Mobility
E
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on CD player 150
Electrical malfunction
– convertible top 42
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 200
– luggage compartment lid 34
– storage compartment, hotel
function 33
Electric convertible top 40
Electric steering wheel
adjustment 52
Electronic brake-force
distribution 83
Electronic Damping Control
EDC 85
Emergency assistance, refer
to Roadside Assistance 225
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– convertible top 42
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 200
– hotel function 33
– luggage compartment lid 34
Emergency release for
luggage compartment lid in
luggage compartment 35
Emergency request 224
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 225
"Enable services" 197
"End call" 184
Engaging forward position,
refer to Selector lever
positions 62
Engine
– breaking-in 116
– data 232
– M Engine Dynamic
Control 64
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 69
– speed 232
– starting 60
– starting, comfort access 36
– switching off 60
Reference
Door lock 32
"Door locks" 30, 73
Doors
– manual operation 32
– remote control 30, 31
DOT Quality Grades 204
Draft-free ventilation 105
Drivelogic 63
"Driver's door only" 30
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 96
Driving programs, refer to
Drivelogic 63
Driving route, refer to
Displaying route 139
Driving stability control
systems 82
Driving through water 117
Driving tips, refer to General
driving notes 116
Drying the air, refer to Cooling
function 104
"DSC" 54, 83
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 83
– indicator lamp 13, 83
– malfunction 84
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control, indicator lamp 13
DVD for navigation 124
"Dynamic route" for
navigation 137
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 83
– M Dynamic Mode MDM 83
Everything from A to Z
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 83
Event data recorders 215
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 117
Exterior mirrors 51
– adjusting 51
– automatic dimming
feature 52
– automatic heating 51
– folding in and out 51
– tilting down passenger-side
mirror 52
External audio device 110
Eye for tow-starting and
towing, refer to Tow
fitting 226
Eyes for lashing, refer to
Securing cargo 119
F
"Fader", refer to Tone
control 152
Fader, refer to Tone
control 152
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 74
False alarm
– refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 36
– refer to Switching off
alarm 35
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 50
Fastest route for
navigation 136
Fast forward
– CD changer 168
– CD player 168
"Fast route" for
navigation 136
"Favorites", calling up with
radio 157
Filler neck for washer fluid 67
Filling bottle, refer to
M Mobility System 218
Filter, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter 105
Fine wood, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
First aid, refer to First-aid
kit 225
First-aid kit 225
Flashing when locking and
unlocking, refer to Setting
confirmation signals 31
Flashlight, refer to
Rechargeable flashlight 110
Flat tire
– Flat Tire Monitor 86
– M Mobility System 218
– run-flat tires 88
– spare wheel 221
– Tire Pressure Monitor 87
– warning lamp 87, 88
Flat Tire Monitor 86
– false alarms 86
– initializing system 86
– limits of system 86
– snow chains 207
– warning lamp 87
Floor mats, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Floor mats/carpets, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Fluid reservoir, refer to Filler
neck for washer fluid 67
"FM", reception
range 150, 154
FM, waveband 154
Folding into raised position
convertible top
compartment floor,
Convertible 35
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 117
Footwell lighting, refer to
Interior lamps 100
For specified oil grades, refer
to Approved engine oils 212
For your own safety 6
Freeway, refer to Route
criteria 136
Front airbags 90
Front passenger airbags,
deactivating 91
"FTM" 87
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 86
Fuel
– average consumption 71
– display 70
– fuel specifications 201
– high-quality brands 201
– quality 201
– specifications 201
– tank contents, refer to
Capacities 235
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 70
Fuel filler door 200
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 200
Fuel gauge 70
Full mobile phone preparation
package 176
Full screen display, refer to
Switching assistance
window off 20
Fuses 223
G
Garage-door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 108
Gasoline
– refer to Average fuel
consumption 71
– refer to Fuel
specifications 201
– refer to Required fuel 201
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 70
Gear changes 63
Gear display, refer to Displays
in instrument cluster 63
Gearshift lever, manual
transmission 61
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
IBOC, refer to High Definition
Radio 158
Ice, refer to Outside
temperature warning 70
ID3-Tag, refer to Information
about track 166
Identification mark
– recommended tire
brands 206
– tire coding 204
Idle 62
iDrive 16
– adjusting brightness 79
– assistance window 20
– changing date and time 78
– changing language 80
– changing menu page 19
– changing settings 77
– changing units of measure
and display form 79
– controller 16
– controls 16
– displays, menus 17
– operating principle 17
– selecting menu item 19
– selecting or confirming
entry 19
– start menu 17
– status information 20
– symbols 18
Ignition 59
– switched off 60
– switched on 59
Ignition key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 59
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 59
Ignition lock 59
– starting engine with comfort
access 38
i menu 17
Imprint 2
Communications Entertainment
Handbrake 61
– indicator lamp 13, 61
Hands-free system, refer to
Microphone 14
Hazard warning flashers 15
"HD radio" 158
HD radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 158
Head airbags 90
Headlamp control,
automatic 96
Headlamp flasher 65
Headlamps
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– cleaning, refer to Wiper
system 66
– cleaning tank, refer to
Capacities 235
– filler neck for washer
fluid 209
– replacing bulbs 216
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Head Light 98
Head restraints
– active front head
restraints 48
– front 48
– sitting safely 45
"Head-Up Display" 54, 93
Head-Up Display 93
– default view 93
– M view 94
– shift lights 64
I
Mobility
H
Heated
– mirrors 51
– rear window 103
– seats 51
– steering wheel 52
Heater 102
Heating
– exterior mirrors 51
– interior 101
– rear window 103
– residual heat utilization 105
– seats 51
– steering wheel 52
Heating with engine switched
off, refer to Residual
heat 105
Heavy cargo, refer to Securing
cargo 119
Height, refer to
Dimensions 233
Height adjustment
– seats 46
– steering wheel 52
High-beam assistant 98
High beams 98
– headlamp flasher 98
– indicator lamp 13
High Definition Radio 158
High water, refer to Driving
through water 117
Hills 118
Holder for cups 111
"Home address" for
navigation system 136
Homepage of BMW 4
Hood 208
Horn 10
Hotel function 33
– unlocking manually 33
Hot exhaust system 117
"Hour memo" 78
"House number" for
destination entry 129
Hydraulic brake assistant,
refer to Brake assistant 83
Hydroplaning 117
– also refer to Minimum tread
depth 205
Reference
General driving notes 116
Glove compartment 109
– rechargeable flashlight 110
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 124
Grills, refer to Ventilation 105
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 235
Ground clearance 116
Everything from A to Z
Indicator/warning lamps
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 84
– airbags 92
– brake system 84
– DSC 13, 83
– DTC 13
– Flat Tire Monitor 87
– handbrake 13, 61
– MDrive 13, 53
– M Dynamic Mode 13, 83
– parking lamps/low beams 13
– safety belt warning 50
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 88
Indicator and warning lamps,
overview 13
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 202
Inflation pressure monitoring
– refer to Flat Tire Monitor 86
– refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 87
Info menu 17
Information
– on another location 132
– on current position 132
– on town/city of
destination 132
"Information" for navigation
system 132
Information menu, refer to
i menu 17
"Information on
destination" 133
"Info sources" 73
Initializing
– Flat Tire Monitor 86
– radio, refer to Storing
stations 156
– refer to Power failure 223
– seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 47
– time and date 77
"Input map" 131
Installation location
– CD changer 168
– drive for navigation DVD 124
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 141
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument lighting 100
Instrument panel
– refer to Cockpit 10
– refer to Instrument
cluster 12
Integrated key 28
Integrated universal remote
control 108
Interesting destination for
navigation 132
"Interim time" 77
Interior lamps 100
– switching on with remote
control 31
Interior motion sensor 36
– switching off 36
Interior rearview mirror,
automatic dimming
feature 52
Intermittent wiper mode 66
J
Jacking points 221
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16
Jump starting 225
K
Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort
access 36
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort access 36
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 29
"Keypad" 186
Keys 28
– key-related settings, refer to
Personal Profile 29
– spare key 28
Kick-down, refer to Drive
mode 63
Knee airbags 90
Knock control 201
L
Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/
low beams 96
Lamps and bulbs 216
"Language / Units" 79
– for navigation
system 125, 141
"Languages" 80
– for navigation
system 125, 141
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 119
Last destinations, refer to
Destination list 133
"Last seat pos." 48
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 57
LEDs light-emitting
diodes 216
Length, refer to
Dimensions 233
License plate lamps, replacing
bulbs 217
Light-emitting diodes
LEDs 216
Lighter 112
"Lighting" 66, 97
Lighting
– instruments 100
– lamps and bulbs 216
– of the vehicle, refer to
Lamps 96
Light switch 96
"Limit" 76
Loading, refer to Cargo
loading 118
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 119
"Lock after driving" 33
Lock buttons in the doors,
refer to Locking 33
Locking 31
– confirmation signals 31
– from inside 33
– from outside 31
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 36
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
M Dynamic Mode MDM 83
– indicator lamp 13, 83
M Engine Dynamic Control 64
– "P 400" 65
– "P 500" 65
– "P 500 Sport" 65
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment
"MDrive" 54
MDrive 53
"M Dynamic Mode" 84
Measurements, refer to
Dimensions
– Convertible 234
– Coupe 233
Memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 47
MENU, button refer to Start
menu 17
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Message list for traffic
information 143
Microfilter 105
Microphone
– for telephone 14
– for voice command
system 14
Mirror dimming feature 52
Mirrors 51
– automatic curb monitor 52
– folding in and out 51
– heating 51
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 47
"Missed calls" 184
Missed calls 185
Mobile phone
– accepted calls 185
– adjusting volume 182
– calling 183
– ending call 183
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 110
– missed calls 185
– operation by voice 187
– operation via iDrive 182
– redialing 185
– refer to separate operating
instructions
– Top 8 185
– touch tone dialing, refer to
Tone dialing method 186
Mobility
M
M Mobility System 218
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 206
Maintenance 214
– refer to Service and
Warranty Information
Booklet for US models 214
– refer to Service
requirements 72
– refer to Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models 214
Maintenance system 214
Malfunction
– convertible top 42
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 200
– hotel function 33
– luggage compartment lid 34
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 74
Manual air distribution 103
"Manual" on the radio 155
Manual operation
– convertible top 42
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 200
– hotel function 33
– luggage compartment lid 34
Manual transmission 61
– tow-starting 228
"Map direction of travel" 140
"Map facing north" 140
Map for navigation
– changing scale 140
– destination entry 131
Map view 140
Map view facing north 140
Master key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Maximum cooling 104
Maximum speed with winter
tires 206
MDM, refer to M Dynamic
Mode 83
Reference
Locking and unlocking doors
– confirmation signals 31
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
Low beams 96
– automatic 96
– indicator lamp 13
– replacing bulbs 216
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 46
Lug bolts 221
– tightening torque, refer to
After mounting 222
– wrench 220
Luggage compartment
– capacity 235
– emergency release 35
– hotel function 33
– increasing capacity,
Convertible 35
– opening/closing, refer to
Luggage compartment
lid 34
– opening from inside 34
– opening from outside 34
– opening with remote
control 31
Luggage compartment lid 34
– comfort access 37
– emergency operation 34
– emergency release 35
– opening from inside 34
– opening from outside 34
– opening with remote
control 31, 34
– unlocking manually 34
Lumbar support 46
LW, waveband 154
Everything from A to Z
Mobile phone battery 190
Mobile Service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 225
Mobility System 218
Monitor, refer to iDrive 16
Monitoring pressure of tires,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 86
"Monitor on / off" 53
Most recent mobile phone
numbers 185
MP3
– compressed audio files 164
– USB/audio interface 171
Multifunction steering wheel,
refer to Buttons on steering
wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 65
– refer to Wiper system 66
Music tracks
– random play sequence 167
– sampling, scan 166
"Mute on / off" 53
"M View" 93
"M view" 94
MW, waveband 154
N
"Navigation" 71, 126
Navigation destination
– entering manually 126
– selecting via map 131
Navigation drive, installation
location 124
Navigation DVD 124
Navigation instructions, refer
to Switching voice
instructions on/off 141
Navigation system 124
– address book 134
– bypassing route
sections 142
– destination entry 126
– destination guidance in
assistance window 124
– destination list 133
– displaying current
position 145
– displaying route 139
– entering a destination
manually 126
– entering destination via
voice 129
– last destinations 133
– looking for interesting
destination 132
– navigation DVD 124
– route list 141
– selecting destination using
information 132
– selecting destination via
map 131
– selecting route criteria 136
– starting destination
guidance 138
– switching off, refer to
Terminating/continuing
destination guidance 138
– terminating/continuing
destination guidance 138
– voice instructions 141
– volume adjustment 142
"Navigation voice
instructions" 53, 141
Neck support, refer to Front
head restraints 48
"New address" for navigation
system 134
"New destination" 126, 131
New remote controls 28
"New route" 142
New wheels and tires 206
"Next entertainment
source" 53
"Normal" with EDC 85
Nozzles, refer to
Ventilation 105
Nozzles, refer to Windshield
washer nozzles 67
Nylon rope, refer to Towstarting and towing 226
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for OBD Onboard
Diagnostics interface 215
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 201
Odometer 69
Oil, refer to Engine oil 210
Oil change interval
– refer to Service and
Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or
Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian
models
– refer to Service
requirements 72
"On a new destination" for
navigation system 132
"Onboard info" 71
Onboard monitor, refer to
iDrive 16
Onboard tool kit 216
"On destination" 132
"On location" 132
Opening and closing
– comfort access 36
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
– using door lock 32
– using the remote control 30
Operating principle, iDrive 17
Operation by voice for mobile
phone 187
– adjusting volume 188
– canceling 187
– commands 187
– correcting phone
number 188
– dialing phone number 188
– placing a call 188
– redialing 189
– voice phone book 188
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Radiator fluid, refer to
Coolant 213
Radio
– Autostore 156
– controls 150
– High Definition Radio 158
– sampling stations 155
– satellite radio 161
– selecting frequency
manually 155
– selecting
waveband 150, 154
– station search 155
– station selection 154
– station with best
reception 156
– storing stations 156
– switching on/off 150
– tone control 151
– volume 151
– Weather Band, refer to
Weather news flashes 158
Radio key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 59
Radio readiness 59
– switched off 60
– switched on 59
– with comfort access 37
Radio stations, storing 156
Rain sensor, windshield wiper
system 66
"Random", random play
sequence 167
Navigation
R
Communications Entertainment
"P 400" 65
"P 500" 65
"P 500 Sport" 65
Panic mode 31
Park Distance Control PDC 81
"Parked car operation" 106
"Parked car ventilation" 106
Parked car ventilation
– activating activation
times 107
– LED 101
– setting activation time 106
– switching on and off
directly 106
Parking, vehicle 60
Parking aid, refer to PDC Park
Distance Control 81
Parking assistant, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 81
Parking brake, refer to
Handbrake 61
Parking lamps 96
– indicator lamp 13
– replacing bulbs 217
Parts and accessories 6
Passenger-side exterior
mirror, tilting down 52
"Pathway lighting" 97
Pathway lighting 97
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 87
"Profile" 197
Programmable button on
steering wheel 53
Programmable memory
buttons 21
Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection system of
windows 40
Mobility
P
"PDC" 82
"PDC display on" 82
PDC Park Distance Control 81
Personal Profile 29
"Perspective" 140
"Phone" 178, 180, 183
Phone book 182
– changing entry 184
– creating and editing voice
phone book 188
– deleting all entries 185
– deleting entry 185
– dialing phone number 184
Phone numbers
– deleting from phone
book 185
– dialing 183
– most recent numbers 185
– selecting in phone book 185
– Top 8 185
Pinch protection system of
power windows 40
Plasters, refer to First-aid
kit 225
"Play" on the radio 162
Plugging unit for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 59
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter 105
Position, refer to Displaying
current position 145
Position, refer to Storing
current position 134
"POWER" 54
POWER, refer to M Engine
Dynamic Control 64
Power failure 223
Power windows, refer to
Windows 38
"Presets" on the
radio 154, 162
Presetting parked car
ventilation activation
times 106
Pressure, tires 202
– producing with M Mobility
System 218
Reference
"Options" 195
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Output, refer to Engine
data 232
Outside air, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air
control 104
Outside temperature
display 70
– changing unit of measure 79
Overview
– operating principle 17
– radio control 150
– screen display 20
Everything from A to Z
"Random all" in audio
mode 168
"Random directory" in audio
mode 167
Random play sequence
– CD changer 167
– CD player 167
"RDS" 157
Reading lamps 100
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 217
Rearview mirrors, refer to
Mirrors 51
Rear window
– heating 103
– opening and closing 39
"Received calls" 184
Reception
– quality 157
– radio stations 157
– regional station 156
Reception quality of mobile
phone, refer to Status
information 20
Rechargeable flashlight 110
Recirculated-air mode, refer
to AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 104
Recirculation of air, refer to
AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 104
Reclining seat, refer to
Seats 46
Recording times, refer to
Stopwatch 77
"Redial" for mobile phone 184
Redialing with mobile
phone 189
Reflectors, refer to Tail
lamps 217
Refueling 200
Releasing, hood 208
Releasing the locks, refer to
Unlocking 37
"Relock door if not
opened" 33
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 71
Remaining distance to
destination, refer to
Computer 71
Remote control 28
– battery replacement 38
– comfort access 36
– garage-door opener 108
– luggage compartment lid 31
– malfunction 31, 38
Removing condensation from
windows 103
"Repeat directory" in audio
mode 167
"Repeat" in audio mode 167
"Repeat track" in audio
mode 167
Replacement fuses 223
Replacement remote control,
refer to New remote
controls 28
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 216
Replacing tires, changing a
wheel 220
Reporting safety defects 7
Required fuel 201
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 70
"Reset" 87, 88
– stopwatch 77
– tone settings 153
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 153
"Reset to default" with
MDrive 54
Residual heat 105
Restraint systems
– for children 56
– refer to Safety belts 50
Retreaded tires 206
Reverse, fast
– CD changer 168
– CD player 168
Reverse gear 62
– manual transmission 61
Road map 140
"Roadside
Assistance" 186, 192
Roadside Assistance 225
Roadside assistance 192
Roadside parking lamps 98
– replacing bulbs, refer to
Parking lamps 217
Rollover protection system on
Convertible 92
– lowering 92
Rope, refer to Tow-starting
and towing 226
Rotary/pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 16
Route 136
– bypassing sections 142
– changing 142
– changing criteria 136
– display 139
– displaying arrow display 139
– displaying map view 140
– displaying streets or towns/
cities 141
– selecting 136
Route information, refer to
Destination guidance with
voice instructions 141
Route map, refer to Displaying
map view 140
"Route preference",
changing 136
Route selection 136
Rubber parts, refer to Caring
for your vehicle brochure
Run-flat tires
– continuing driving with a
damaged tire 88
– flat tire 88
S
Safety belts 50
– damage 51
– indicator lamp 50
– refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– reminder 50
– sitting safely 45
Safety belt tensioners, refer to
Safety belts 50
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment
"Service Status" 197
"Set"
– in audio mode 150
– in trip computer 72
"Set date" 79
"Set service date" 74
"Set time" 78
Setting button, refer to
Controls, controller 16
"Settings" 197
– for BMW Assist 195
– for unlocking 30
Settings
– changing on Control
Display 77
– clock, 12h/24h mode 78
– configuring, refer to
MDrive 53
– configuring, refer to
Personal Profile 29
– date 79
– language 80
– units of measure 79
Settings menu, refer to
i menu 17
Setting time, refer to
Preselecting activation
time 106
Shifting 63
Shift lights 64
Shiftlock 62
Shift paddles on steering
wheel 63
Shock absorber control, refer
to EDC Electronic Damping
Control 85
Short commands of voice
command system 236
"Short route" for
navigation 136
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 136
"Show current position" 131
"Show destination
position" 131
Side airbags 90
Side turn signals, replacing
bulbs 217
Mobility
Selecting frequency
manually 155
Selecting menu items 19
Selecting route 136
Selection options with
navigation system 136
Selector lever 62
– manual transmission 61
– Sequential Manual
Transmission 62
Selector lever lock, refer to
Shiftlock 62
Sequential Manual
Transmission with
Drivelogic 62
– Drivelogic driving
programs 63
– Drive mode 63
– idle 62
– initializing system, refer to
After changing wheels/
tires 207
– kick-down 63
– reverse gear 62
– Sequential mode 62
– shift lights 64
– shiftlock 62
– towing 227
– tow-starting 228
Sequential mode 62
"Service" 73, 193, 211
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 225
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for
US models 214
Service Interval Display
– refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 214
– refer to Service
requirements 72
"Service notification" 193
"Service Request" 186, 193
"Service
requirements" 73, 193, 211
Service requirements 72
– refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 214
Reference
Safety systems
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 82
– airbags 90
– driving stability control
systems 82
– rollover protection system,
Convertible 92
– safety belts 50
Satellite radio 161
– enabling channels 161
– selecting channel 162
– storing channel 162
"SAT" with radio 150, 161
"Save current
destination" 136
"Scan"
– music tracks on CD 166
– stations with radio 155
Scan
– CD changer 166
– CD player 166
– radio 155
"Scan all" in audio mode 166
"Scan directory" in audio
mode 166
Screw thread for tow
fitting 227
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 161
Seats 46
– adjusting 46
– adjusting backrest width 46
– heating 51
– lumbar support 46
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 47
– sitting safely 45
– storing the setting 47
– thigh support 46
Securing cargo 119
– ski bag 113
"Select as
destination" 132, 195
"Select current speed" 77
Selecting audio sources, refer
to Operating via iDrive 150
Everything from A to Z
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Signaling a turn, triple turn
signal activation 65
Sill panel lighting, refer to
Interior lamps 100
Sitting safely 45
– with airbags 45
– with head restraints 45
– with safety belts 45
Ski bag 112
Slope assistant, refer to
Starting off on slopes 117
SMG, refer to Sequential
Manual Transmission with
Drivelogic 62
"SMG Drivelogic" 54, 64
Snap-in adapter
– mounting/removing 189
– using 176
Snow chains 207
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 112
Socket for Onboard
Diagnostics interface 215
Socket for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 59
Soft closure aid, refer to
Automatic soft closing 34
Song search with CD, refer to
Sampling tracks, scan 166
SOS, refer to Initiating an
emergency request 224
Spare
– adapter for spare key 28
– fuses 223
– key 28
– wheel, driving with spare
wheel 222
– wheel, refer to Changing
wheels 220
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 212
Speed-dependent
volume 152
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 76
Speedometer 12
"Speed volume", refer to Tone
control 152
Speed with winter tires 206
"Sport" with EDC 85
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 82
Start/Stop button 59
– starting the engine 60
– switching off the engine 60
"Start" for stopwatch 77
"Start guidance" 129, 138
Starting assistant, refer to
Starting off on slopes 117
Starting difficulties, refer to
Jump starting 225
Starting engine 60
Starting off
– on a slippery surface 117
– on slopes 117
Start menu, iDrive 17
"Start route guidance" 131
"Start service" 193
"Start Service" for
BMW Assist 194
"State / Province" for
destination entry 127
"State inspection" 74
Station, refer to Radio 154
"Status" 73
Status information on Control
Display 20
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steering wheel
– adjustment 52
– automatic adjustment, refer
to Easy entry/exit 52
– automatic adjustment, refer
to Steering wheel
memory 47
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– heating 52
– lock, refer to Ignition lock 59
– MDrive button 53
– memory 47
– programmable button 53
– shift paddles 63
"Steering wheel button" 53
Steering-wheel shift buttons,
refer to Shift paddles 63
"Stop" for stopwatch 77
"Stopwatch" 77
Stopwatch 77
Storage compartments 110
"Store in address book" for
navigation system 134
"Store" on the radio 156, 163
Storing current position 134
Storing sitting position, refer
to Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 47
Storing tires 207
"Street" for destination
entry 128
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 202
"Surround Settings", refer to
Tone control 152
SW, waveband 154
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching automatically
between high beams and
low beams, refer to Highbeam assistant 98
Switching on
– audio 150
– CD changer 150
– CD player 150
– radio 150
Swiveling headlamps, refer to
Adaptive Head Light 98
Symbols 4
– indicator and warning
lamps 13
– navigation system 144
– status information 20
– traffic information with
navigation system 142
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment
Tone dialing method 186
Tone in audio mode
– adjusting 151
– middle setting 153
Tone on locking/unlocking 31
Tools, refer to Onboard tool
kit 216
Top 40
"Top 8" for mobile phone 184
Torque
– lug bolts, refer to After
mounting 222
– refer to Engine data 232
Touch tone dialing, refer to
Tone dialing method 186
Tow bar 227
Tow fitting 226
Towing 226
– methods 227
– tow fittings 226
– with manual
transmission 227
"Town / City" for destination
entry 127
Tow rope 227
Tow-starting 226
"TPM" 88
TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 87
– resetting system 88
– system limits 87
– warning lamp 88
Tracks
– finding 166
– random sequence 167
– sampling on CD 166
– selecting with CD 165
Track width, refer to
Dimensions 233
Traction control, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 83
Traffic congestion
– displaying traffic
information 142
– refer to Bypassing route
sections 142
Mobility
Tachometer 69
Tail lamps 217
– replacing bulbs 217
Tank capacity
– also refer to Capacities 235
– fuel tank capacity 200
Target cursor for
navigation 131
Technical alterations, refer to
For your own safety 6
Technical data 232
Telematics, refer to
BMW Assist 191
Telephone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 110
– refer to Mobile phone 176
– refer to separate operating
instructions
"Telephone list" 53
TeleService 193
Temperature
– adjusting in upper body
region 103
– adjusting with automatic
climate control 102
– changing units of
measure 79
– refer to Coolant
temperature 69
Temperature display
– changing units of
measure 79
– outside temperature 69
– outside temperature
warning 70
Temperature gauge, engine
oil 70
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 67
"Terminate services" 196
"Text language" 80
"Theater", refer to Tone
control 153
The individual vehicle 5
Tie-down points, refer to
Securing cargo 119
Tightening torque of the lug
bolts, refer to After
mounting 222
Tilt alarm sensor 36
– switching off 36
Tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 52
"Time" 78
"Time / Date" 78
"Time format" 78
Timer, refer to Preselecting
activation time 106
"Timer 1" for parked-car
ventilation 106
"Timer 2" for parked-car
ventilation 106
Tire inflation pressure 202
Tire pressure loss 88
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 87
Tire Quality Grading 204
Tire replacement, new wheels
and tires 206
Tires
– age 204
– air loss 87, 88
– breaking-in 116
– condition 205
– damage 205
– inflation pressure 202
– minimum tread depth 205
– M Mobility System 218
– monitoring inflation
pressure, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 86
– new wheels and tires 206
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor 87
– replacing 206
– retreaded tires 206
– size 203
– size, refer to The right
wheels and tires 206
– wear indicators 205
– wheel/tire combination 206
– winter tires 206
TMC station, refer to Traffic
information 142
"Tone" 151
Reference
T
Everything from A to Z
Traffic information for
navigation
– depiction in route map 144
– displaying 143
– during destination
guidance 145
– symbols 144
Traffic information with
navigation 142
"Traffic Info settings" 143
Transmission
– breaking-in 116
– Drivelogic 63
– Drive mode 63
– idle 62
– kick-down, refer to Drive
mode 63
– manual transmission 61
– reverse gear 62
– Sequential Manual
Transmission with
Drivelogic 62
– Sequential mode 62
– shift lights 64
– starting assistant, refer to
Starting off on slopes 117
– towing 227
– tow-starting 228
Transporting children
safely 56
Transport securing device,
refer to Securing cargo 119
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tread depth 205
Treble, refer to Tone
control 151
"Treble", tone control 151
"Trip computer" 72
Trip computer 72
Trip-distance counter
– refer to Trip computer 72
– refer to Trip meter 69
"Triple turn signal" 66
Trip meter, also refer to Trip
computer 72
Trip odometer 69
Trunk, refer to Luggage
compartment 35
Trunk lid, refer to Luggage
compartment lid 34
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 233
Turn signals 65
U
"Unchanged", with MDrive 54
Undercarriage protection,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 204
"Units" 79
Units
– average fuel
consumption 79
– temperature 79
Universal garage-door
opener, refer to Integrated
universal remote
control 108
Universal remote control, refer
to Integrated universal
remote control 108
"Unlock button" 30
Unlocking
– from inside 33
– from outside 30
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 36
Unlocking without key, refer to
Comfort access 36
"Update services" 195
Upshift display, refer to Shift
lights 64
USB/audio interface 171
"USB" in audio mode 172
"Use current location as
address" 134, 136
Used batteries
– refer to Disposal 223
– refer to Replacing battery 38
Using turn signals 65
V
Valve screw caps, refer to
After mounting 222
Vehicle
– battery 222
– breaking-in 116
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– cargo loading 118
– measurements, refer to
Dimensions 233
– parking 60
– washing, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
– weights 235
"Vehicle / Tires" for
unlocking 30
Vehicle jack 220
– jacking points 221
Vehicle position, refer to
Displaying current
position 145
Ventilation 105
– draft-free 105
– for cooling 105
– parked car ventilation 106
Vent outlets of automatic
climate control 101
"Vent settings" 104
Viscosity 212
Voice, refer to Destination
guidance with voice
instructions 141
Voice command system
– overview 23
– short commands 236
Voice instructions for
navigation system 141
– muting 53
– repeating 53, 142
– switching on/off 53, 141
– volume 142
Voice phone book 188
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Xenon lamps 216
– replacing bulbs 216
Y
Your individual vehicle
– programmable button on
steering wheel 53
– settings, refer to MDrive 53
– settings, refer to Personal
Profile 29
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
X
Communications Entertainment
Warning lamps, refer to
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 74
Warning triangle 225
Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian
models 214
Washer fluid
– capacity of the reservoir 67
– wiper system 67
Washing the vehicle, also refer
to Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 117
Waveband for radio 154
"WB" 150, 158
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 205
Weather news flashes 158
Website BMW 4
Weights 235
Welcome lamps 96
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to New wheels and tires 206
Wheel/tire damage 205
Wiper system 66
– rain sensor 66
– washer fluid 67
– windshield washer
nozzles 67
"With highways" for
navigation system 136
Wood decoration, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Word matching principle for
navigation 137
Working in the engine
compartment 208
Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer
to Onboard tool kit 216
Mobility
W
Wheel/tire replacement, refer
to New wheels and tires 206
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 233
Wheels and tires 202
Width, refer to
Dimensions 233
Wind deflector 43
Windows 38
– comfort closing with comfort
access 37
– convenient operation 31, 32
– opening and closing,
Convertible 38
– opening and closing,
Coupe 38
– rear window, Convertible 39
Windshield
– cleaning, refer to Wiper
system 66
– defrosting, refer to
Defrosting windows 103
– displays, refer to Head-Up
Display 93
Windshield wash
– automatic, refer to Rain
sensor 66
– capacities, reservoir 235
– filler neck for washer
fluid 209
– nozzles 67
– washer fluid 67
– wiper system 66
Windshield wipers, refer to
Washer system, replacing
wiper blades 216
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 66
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Winter tires 206
– setting speed limit 76
– storage 207
Wiper blades
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– replacing 216
Reference
Volume 150
– audio sources 150
– fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 235
– luggage compartment 235
– mobile phone 182
– setting speeddependent 152
– voice instructions 142
– windshield cleaning system,
refer to Capacities 235
Volume adjustment in audio
mode
– front-to-rear 152
– right/left 152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG
More about BMW
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
01 41 0 014 244 ue
bmwusa.com
*BL001424400B*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 244 - © 08/07 BMW AG